IRT310

IRT310 Master Data in SAP for Retail SAP for Industries - SAP for Retail

Date Training Center Instructors Education Website

Instructor Handbook Course Version: 2006/Q2 Course Duration: 5 Days Material Number: 50079221 Owner: Kerstin Zinke (D023384)

An SAP Compass course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Copyright Copyright © 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.

Trademarks •

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

•

IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

•

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

•

INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.

•

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

•

Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

•

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

•

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

•

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.

•

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g20072293438

About This Handbook This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used. Type Style

Description

Example text

Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options. Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal (in this documentation) and external (in other locations, such as SAPNet).

2006/Q2

Example text

Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT

Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text

Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program.

Example text

Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.



Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

iii

About This Handbook

IRT310

Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon

Meaning For more information, tips, or background Note or further explanation of previous point Exception or caution Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor’s presentation.

iv

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Contents Course Overview ......................................................... vii Course Goals ...........................................................vii Course Objectives ..................................................... ix

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail .......................... 1 Organizational Structures in Retail ...................................2

Unit 2: Business Partner ............................................... 19 Customer............................................................... 20 Vendor .................................................................. 26

Unit 3: Sites ............................................................... 41 Sites .................................................................... 43 Site Maintenance ..................................................... 55 Layout .................................................................. 73

Unit 4: Article Groupings .............................................. 87 Classification .......................................................... 89 Merchandise Categories ............................................. 96 Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories ....... 113 Article Hierarchy......................................................122

Unit 5: Assortment Management .................................... 139 Assortment............................................................141 Listing Procedures ...................................................169 Assortment List.......................................................182

Unit 6: Single Articles.................................................. 195 Creating Articles......................................................197 Article Fast Entry .....................................................230 PRICAT................................................................249 Article List .............................................................261 Configuring the Article Master......................................271 Article Discontinuation...............................................287

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants .............................. 303 Characteristics .......................................................305 Creating a Generic Article ..........................................318 Prepack ...............................................................339

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

v

Contents

IRT310

Additionals ............................................................348

Unit 8: Structured Articles ............................................ 363 Structured Articles ...................................................364

Unit 9: Logistical Variants ............................................ 379 Logistical Variants....................................................380

vi

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Course Overview Your company has decided to implement SAP Retail, and you are responsible for maintaining and optimizing master data. Employees should - as far as possible - work efficiently and without errors occurring. Therefore, you create an optimal reference concept. The article master is also configured in different ways for different groups of employees, depending on their requirements. This means that individual employees can see and process only the data that is relevant to them.

Target Audience This course is intended for the following audiences: • •

Project team members SAP consultants

Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge • •

Basic knowledge of retailing SAPIRT Function Overview in SAP for Retail

Recommended Knowledge •

None.

Course Duration Details

2006/Q2

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail Organizational Structures in Retail Exercise 1: Organizational Units

60 Minutes 15 Minutes

Unit 2: Business Partner Customer Vendor Exercise 2: Vendor

20 Minutes 30 Minutes 20 Minutes

Unit 3: Sites Sites Exercise 3: Sites Site Maintenance Exercise 4: Creating a Site

60 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 15 Minutes

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

vii

Course Overview

IRT310

Exercise 5: Department Store and Shop Maintenance Layout Exercise 6: Layout Unit 4: Article Groupings Classification Merchandise Categories Exercise 7: Merchandise Categories Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories Exercise 8: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories Article Hierarchy Exercise 9: Article Hierarchy

30 Minutes 45 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes

Unit 5: Assortment Management Assortment Exercise 10: Reference Site Exercise 11: General Assortments Listing Procedures Exercise 12: Listing Procedures Assortment List Exercise 13: Assortment List

40 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes 15 Minutes

Unit 6: Single Articles Creating Articles Exercise 14: Creating Articles Exercise 15: - optional Article Fast Entry Exercise 16: Article Fast Entry PRICAT Exercise 17: PRICAT Article List Exercise 18: Article List Configuring the Article Master Exercise 19: Configuring the Article Master Article Discontinuation Exercise 20: Article Discontinuation

60 Minutes 30 Minutes 20 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 40 Minutes 30 Minutes 15 Minutes 60 Minutes 30 Minutes 30 Minutes 20 Minutes

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants Characteristics Exercise 21: Characteristics Creating a Generic Article Exercise 22: Creating a Generic Article Exercise 23: Pricing for Generic Articles and Variants Prepack

viii

30 Minutes 30 Minutes 15 Minutes

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

30 Minutes 20 Minutes 120 Minutes 30 Minutes 15 Minutes 30 Minutes

2006/Q2

IRT310

Course Overview

Exercise 24: Structured Articles Additionals Exercise 25: Additionals

20 Minutes 45 Minutes 20 Minutes

Unit 8: Structured Articles Structured Articles Exercise 26: Full Products and Empties

45 Minutes 15 Minutes

Unit 9: Logistical Variants Logistical Variants Exercise 27: Logistical Variants

60 Minutes 15 Minutes

Course Goals This course will prepare you to: • •

Maintain and configure the specific SAP Retail master data Use and discover the advantages of the reference concept

Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: • • •

Describe the organizational structures in SAP Retail and know where these organizational structures can be set up Maintain general Retail master data and configure it according to your requirements Describe the SAP Retail reference concept and use it according to your requirements

SAP Software Component Information The information in this course pertains to the following SAP Software Components and releases: This manual refers to SAP for Retail™ and von SAP Retail™. Here, SAP for Retail™ refers to the SAP solution for Retail, while SAP Retail™ refers to the system SAP ECC, which is an SAP Retail system. The SAP Retail business function set must also be activated. The instructor information for course IRT310 was compiled in a separate document. Therefore, this manual does not contain any instructor information. You can find the instructor information on SAP Service Marketplace under the quick link /curr-info. Link: https://service.sap.com/curr-info

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

ix

Course Overview

x

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 1 Organizational Structures in Retail

1

Give the participants a general overview over the existing organizational structures and the organizational structures to be created in an SAP Retail system. Point out that the organizational structures must be maintained so that further master data such as the article and vendor - can be maintained, and so that every process in the system can be carried out correctly.

Unit Overview This unit explains that the organizational structures and their assignments, which are supported by SAP Retail, are a basic prerequisite for working in the SAP Retail system. It describes additional controls that must be maintained for the Industry Solution SAP for Retail at organizational structure level.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • •

Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which are supported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizational structures

Unit Contents Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail ....................................2 Exercise 1: Organizational Units .......................................... 13

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

1

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

Lesson: 2

IRT310

Organizational Structures in Retail Lesson Duration: 60 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which are supported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizational structures

It is not the objective of this lesson to discuss the optimal organizational structure for individual customers. SAP offers special workshops for this purpose, as customer requirements vary greatly. The aim of this lesson is to convey customers the attributes of the individual organizational structures as a basis for their decision-making and to show them where they can set the organizational structures in the system.

Business Example You have decided to implement the Industry Solution SAP for Retail. You have analyzed your current organizational structures and discussed mapping them onto the corresponding structures in SAP Retail. You now create the organizational units and their assignments in SAP Retail.

SAP Retail Overview SAP Retail is a complete system that supports competitive assortment strategies, variable sales technologies and corresponding site categories, as well as consumer-oriented distribution logistics when dealing with consumer products. It provides all important functions you need to map your business processes in a retail company. The aim is to completely map the value chain from the consumer to the vendor, and to optimize the various functions and control processes in the flow of goods and information between vendors, retail and consumers.

2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Organizational Structures Flexible organizational units in SAP Retail make it possible to map even complex organizational structures. A large number of organizational units makes it possible to map the legal and organizational structure of a retail company from different business viewpoints. Many organizational units are also data retention levels, which means that, when there are several organizational units like this, different data can be stored for each one. SAP Retail is client-capable. A client is a corporate group that can subdivide into subsidiaries. In SAP Retail, organizational units can be set up for the individual departments of a company. This means that the organizational units reflect the subdivision of a company from a business viewpoint in SAP Retail.

Figure 1: Organizational Structures

The variable organizational structures in the SAP system offer the following advantages: • • •

The flexibility to be able to map complex company structures Separate logistical views (purchasing, sales and distribution), the managerial accounting view and the external accounting view The option of cross-company-code processing

Organizational structures are maintained in Customizing (Implementation Guide). They must be created individually and then assigned to each other. The most important organizational units in SAP Retail are listed below.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

3

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

IRT310

Financial Accounting and Controlling

Figure 2: Organizational Structures in Financial Accounting and Controlling

The client is a corporate group that can subdivide into subsidiaries. The controlling area is an organizational unit of the internal accounting, which subdivides the company from the controlling viewpoint. One or more company codes can be assigned to a controlling area, if they have the same chart of accounts. The company code is an organizational unit of the external accounting, which subdivides the company from the financial accounting viewpoint. You can set up several company codes in one client to keep several independent accounts at the same time. You must, however, set up at least one company code in each client. The company code is the accounting unit to draw up the financial statement. This can be, but does not have to be, identical to the controlling area. In a central organization, generally a maximum of one uniform chart of accounts is defined at corporate group level and this is then valid for all company codes. In a decentralized organization, the chart of accounts is defined at company code level. All the company codes that belong to a cross-company-code cost accounting must use the same operational chart of accounts. The company is defined from the controlling viewpoint using the controlling area, operating concern and profit center. The controlling area structures a company from the controlling viewpoint.

4

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Figure 3: Organizational Structures in Financial Accounting

The company is defined from the accounting viewpoint using the company code and business area. A company code is an independent accounting unit in the sense of a legally independent company. It is the central organizational element of the financial accounting. In Retail, the entire company can represent a company code, but a distribution chain or even each individual site can be displayed as a company code too. In a client, you can set up several business areas, which can be assigned to an account in all company codes that are defined in this client. At business area level, you can carry out settlements and profit and loss statements for internal purposes. The business area is an organizational unit of the accounting, which corresponds to a defined activity area of the company or an area of responsibility in the company. Business areas enable you to structure operating levels according to their business contents. This means that distribution chains or individual sites, for example, can be displayed as business areas. For a consistent document entry, it makes sense for business areas in all company codes to have the same meaning. Each valuation-relevant transaction creates a financial accounting document, which lists the G/L accounts posted to and the details of the posting.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

5

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

IRT310

Figure 4: Organizational Structures: Valuation

A site can be a store, a distribution center, or a production location. In SAP Retail, the site is the selling and inventory management organizational unit. Every site belongs to just one company code. Stocks are updated by goods movements on both a quantity and value basis. The relevant G/L accounts in accounting, which are affected by this transaction, are determined and posted to via automatic account determination. A valuation area is the organizational unit for value-based inventory management. In SAP Retail, the valuation area must always correspond to a site. Inventory management on a value-only basis is carried out at valuation area level. Every site is a valuation area in SAP Retail. This is already determined when the system is set up as a Retail system and it is unchangeable. The valuation area does not appear on the screen, it is controlled internally. In the SAP standard, the site and the company code can be set as a valuation area.

6

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Logistics

Figure 5: Organizational structures in Purchasing

A purchasing organization procures articles for several sites and negotiates purchase conditions with the vendors. A complete purchasing transaction is managed by one purchasing organization. Authorizations for master data maintenance and purchasing management are assigned per purchasing organization. A purchasing organization can be assigned to one company code. If this is the case, the purchasing organization can only purchase for sites that belong to the same company code. A reference for one purchasing organization can also be applied to another purchasing organization, so that the conditions, contracts and purchasing info records can be used together. A purchasing group is similar to a purchasing department in that it consists of one or more buyers. Purchasing groups are responsible for maintaining master data and control data, and for the operative purchasing management. Authorizations can be assigned to each purchasing group individually. The purchasing group is not a data retention level. A purchasing area can be used as a connecting link between the purchasing organization and the purchasing group. It is used as an additional hierarchy level during the evaluation. However, it is not a data retention level. In order to map this connecting link, one purchasing area is assigned to a combination of a purchasing organization and a purchasing group in Customizing.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

7

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

IRT310

Figure 6: Organizational Structures: Inventory Management

To be able to keep track of the goods flow in the company, article stocks must be managed on a quantity basis in the system. In SAP Retail, the site is the selling and inventory-managing unit. A site can be a store or a distribution center. The storage location is an organizational unit that makes it possible to differentiate between stocks in a site. In a distribution center, a storage location can map various logistical functions (for example, a cross-docking storage location, a lean-WM-managed storage location). Usually a store is assigned to one storage location, but additional storage locations can also be managed for outdoor stock (for example, camping articles, furniture). You can differentiate between stocks of an article in a storage location on the basis of batches. It is also possible to maintain expiration dates.

8

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Figure 7: Inventory Management in the Distribution Center

WM: Warehouse Management MM: Material Management Transactions that cause a change in stock and the resulting stock updates are entered in the system in real time, enabling physical stock levels to be mirrored exactly in the inventory management. There are three different organizational structure options in a distribution center: inventory management on the storage location (MM-managed storage location), inventory management on the storage location with a storage location that is managed by a lean WM, and inventory management on the storage bin with a WM-managed storage location = Warehouse Management system. For complex distribution centers, the Warehouse Management system allows stock to be differentiated up to storage bin level. This means that structures, such as those of a high rack storage area, can be displayed. The Warehouse Management system is integrated into the whole system by connecting a storage location to a warehouse number. If, for example, a goods receipt is posted to the inventory management, an action to put away the goods is triggered in the Warehouse Management. A complex warehouse structure is managed under a warehouse number. Various partial warehouses, the organizational and technical attributes of which differ, are defined as storage types, such as the goods receipt area, goods issue area, high rack storage area and picking bin. The individual storage bins are defined in a storage type. They are the smallest organizational units that can be

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

9

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

IRT310

called in the system. They can be called using coordinates such as 05-04-03 for aisle 05, stack 04, level 03. When an article appears on a storage bin, it is flagged as quant. Transport orders are used to transport the articles within the warehouse (for example, from the goods receipt area to the storage bin). The Lean WM is a warehouse structure with which transport orders can be used as pick orders, even in simply structured warehouses. Transport orders can be created for deliveries (excluding goods receipts or goods issue), even if storage bins are not managed in the WM. Inventory management occurs at storage location level only. The system does not use quants to update the stock data at storage bin level, but display fixed bins for information only. You can use the Lean WM if you want to pick deliveries using transfer orders in a warehouse that you do not manage with the Warehouse Management system.

Figure 8: Organizational Structures in Sales

The sales organization is an organizational unit of the logistics, which subdivides the company according to the requirements of sales and distribution. Every sales organization represents a selling unit in the legal sense and is, for example, responsible for product liability and any customer’s rights of recourse. It is also responsible for the sales and distribution of the article, and negotiates sales conditions. You can use sales organizations to divide your market into regions, for example, into countries. A complete business transaction in sales and distribution is always managed in a sales organization.

10

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

In SAP Retail, a sales organization can be assigned to a purchasing organization. This means that the hierarchy creation that is displayed in the figure may be enforced. For statistical purposes, this may be of interest. In some cases, both terms are identical. A reference to another sales organization can be created for one sales organization at sales document type level. The sales document types of the referenced sales organization are then used. In combination with the distribution channel, the sales organization forms a distribution chain. Sales and distribution uses different distribution channels in terms of distribution lanes or distribution channels. Possible distribution channels include, for example, sales to the consumer via various store chains or mail order. The distribution channel is assigned to a sales organization. In SAP Retail, the distribution chain category of a distribution chaindetermines, if it will be used to supply sites or wholesale customers respectively, or to supply consumers. References to other distribution chains in the same sales organization can be created for a distribution chain. This means that customer and article master data, sales document types and condition types can be accessed from the distribution chain that is being referenced. A division must be defined, although SAP Retail does not use it in the retail functions. Together with the division, a distribution chain forms a sales area. If just one division is created, then the sales area is functionally almost identical to the distribution chain for retail.

Copy Function

Figure 9: Organizational Structures: Copy Function

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

11

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

IRT310

In the SAP System, you have the option of processing existing organizational structures. The following functions are available: •

Copy: Use this function if you want to create a new organizational unit and want to use the existing settings as a template.

•

Delete: Use this function if you want to delete an existing organizational unit with all dependent entries.

•

Check: Use this function to check all the settings for an existing organizational unit.

Be careful to delete or copy only the system settings (in Customizing). Master data is not included in this process. If you only want to process mandatory activities in the system settings, then you must use the copy function to create the new organizational units. This is the only way you can make all the necessary system settings.

12

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

13

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

Exercise 1: Organizational Units Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Find organizational structures in the Implementation Guide (IMG)

Business Example A new employee needs to become familiar with the most important elements of your company structure quickly. Show the structures in the SAP system to the new employee.

Task 1: Display the existing organizational structures in the Implementation Guide (IMG). 1.

View the definition and assignments of some organizational levels in the Implementation Guide:

2.

Where can you find the definition of a company code in the Implementation Guide? Specify the menu path. ________________________________________________

3.

For the duration of the course you will use R300 as your company code. What is the name of this company code? ______________________________________________________ Which currency and language are set by default in company code R300? ______________________________________________________

Task 2: You now work more closely with the company’s organizational units. Check the existing assignments of sales organization RG10. 1.

Which organizational units form a distribution chain? ______________________________________________________

2.

What distribution chains are there for the sales organization RG10? ______________________________________________________

3.

To which company code is the sales organization RG10 assigned? ______________________________________________________

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

13

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

IRT310

Solution 1: Organizational Units Task 1: Display the existing organizational structures in the Implementation Guide (IMG). 1.

View the definition and assignments of some organizational levels in the Implementation Guide: a)

2.

Tools → AcceleratedSAP → IMG → Execute Project, Goto → SAP Reference IMG

Where can you find the definition of a company code in the Implementation Guide? Specify the menu path. ________________________________________________

3.

a)

IMG: Enterprise Structure → Definition → Financial Accounting → Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code

b)

Edit Company Code Data

For the duration of the course you will use R300 as your company code. What is the name of this company code? ______________________________________________________ Which currency and language are set by default in company code R300? ______________________________________________________ a)

Select R300 : Goto → Details Company Name

IDES Retail INC US

Currency

USD

Language

EN

Task 2: You now work more closely with the company’s organizational units. Check the existing assignments of sales organization RG10. 1.

Which organizational units form a distribution chain? ______________________________________________________ a)

2.

A distribution chain is formed from the sales organization and distribution channel organizational units.

What distribution chains are there for the sales organization RG10? Continued on next page

14

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Organizational Structures in Retail

______________________________________________________ a)

3.

IMG: Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution → Assign distribution channel to sales organization R1

Stores US

R5

Distribution US

R6

PCS Wholesale

R7

Internet/Catalog US

00-30

IRT320 Group ##

40-70

IRT320 Wholesale ##

To which company code is the sales organization RG10 assigned? ______________________________________________________ a)

IMG: Enterprise Structure → Assignment → Sales and Distribution → Assign sales organization to company code Sales organization RG10 is assigned to company code R300.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

15

Unit 1: Organizational Structures in Retail

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which are supported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail • In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizational structures

16

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Show that the organizational structures and their assignments, which are supported by SAP Retail, are a basic requirement for working in SAP Retail • In the Implementation Guide, locate the settings for the organizational structures

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

17

Unit Summary

18

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 2 Business Partner

19

This unit describes the vendor and customer business partner categories. The transactions used here are those that are used in the SAP standard. Neither business partner category differs from the SAP standard.

Unit Overview This unit describes the structure of business partner master records, explains the task of the account group, and specifies the options for the maintenance of different purchasing data for the vendor.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • •

Name the different customer categories Describe the structure of a customer master record Describe the structure of a vendor master record Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

Unit Contents Lesson: Customer ............................................................... 20 Lesson: Vendor .................................................................. 26 Exercise 2: Vendor .......................................................... 33

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

19

Unit 2: Business Partner

Lesson: 20

IRT310

Customer Lesson Duration: 20 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Name the different customer categories Describe the structure of a customer master record

The customer master record is also discussed in the Sites lesson. A customer master record must always be created when a new site is created.

Business Example You deliver goods to new customers and create their customer master records so that the delivery and payroll processes run smoothly in the system.

Customer Master Data

Figure 10: Customer: Definition

20

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Customer

Figure 11: Customer: Master Data

As a customer is regarded as a business partner of the company in financial accounting, the customer master record is used by both sales and financial accounting. Customers are classified as debitors in financial accounting. Every site has a customer master record.

Figure 12: Customer: Business Partner

“Business partner” is an SAP term. A business partner is a person or organization with which you do business.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

21

Unit 2: Business Partner

IRT310

In the SAP system, business partners are defined according to roles that they fulfill and according to requirements that they apply to you. Examples include: • •

Contact person, for example, someone with whom you want to keep regular contact (for example, management) Personnel, for example, sales employees or employees who you represent at trade fairs

When you are defining a business partner, you should remember who expects payment from you (for example, a commission or fee) and who receives documents from you (for example, forms, letters or other messages). When you are creating customer master records, you must create a master record for a sold-to party. When you create these mandatory roles, the SAP system automatically completes the partner role view of this master record with entries for the ship-to party, bill-to party and payer. The SAP system defaults the same person for all four partner roles. You can overwrite these default values.

Figure 13: Customer: Customer Account Groups

The account group is a template for creating customer master records. The account group determines: • • •

22

The data fields in the master record that are either hidden or displayed, and are either required entry or optional entry fields The number range for the customer of the sold-to party or the ship-to party and so on A number of other control elements

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Customer

Example: A customer master record for a ship-to party (created with account group 0002) contains certain views and data fields. This master record requires information relevant to shipping. All the fields relevant to billing are hidden. Account groups are contained in the standard system. If required, you can create additional account groups.

Figure 14: Organizational Structures in Wholesale (Example)

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

23

Unit 2: Business Partner

IRT310

Facilitated Discussion Summarize the most important points of this lesson.

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. What is the difference between external and internal customers? What is the purpose of partner roles? What do account groups do?

24

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Customer

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the different customer categories • Describe the structure of a customer master record

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

25

Unit 2: Business Partner

Lesson: 25

IRT310

Vendor Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Describe the structure of a vendor master record Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

The vendor master record is also discussed in the Sites lesson. When a new distribution center is created, a vendor master record is always generated too so that delivery and payroll processes can be mapped to internal and external customers.

Business Example From now on you will be receiving goods from a new vendor and you have to create a master record for this vendor in the system. You determine which articles are delivered from your new vendor and under what conditions they are delivered.

Vendor Master Data

Figure 15: Vendor: Definition

26

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Vendor

Figure 16: Vendor: Master Data

The data in the vendor master record is subdivided into three categories: •

General Data: This includes the address and banking details of the creditor. The data is valid on a client-wide basis. You will also find the procurement monitoring fields here.

•

Purchasing Data: This includes the purchase order currency, incoterms and various control data of the creditor. This data is maintained for the relevant purchasing organization. You can also enter alternative data that is only valid for specific sites or for vendor sub-ranges.

•

Financial Accounting Data: This includes, for example, the number of the reconciliation account and the payment methods for the automatic payment transactions. Financial accounting data is maintained at company code level.

A vendor master record may be blocked, if, for example, the quality of the products supplied by this vendor is substandard. You can use the source list to block a vendor for an individual article/SKU.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

27

Unit 2: Business Partner

IRT310

Figure 17: Vendor: Purchasing Data

These are vendor-related entries, which you can maintain for every purchasing organization in your client. It concerns data that is important for purchasing, such as purchasing data and partner functions. In addition to maintaining the data that is valid for the entire purchasing organization, you can also maintain data for a specific site and/or vendor sub-range in the purchasing data and partner function screens. This may include, for example, terms of payment or Incoterms that differ from the terms of payment or Incoterms in the purchasing organization. You can create this alternative data for the vendor at the following data retention levels: • • •

Vendor sub-range (VSR) Site Vendor sub-range/site

The data retention level from which the system defaults data, for example, in a purchase order, is determined in the following sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4.

28

Vendor sub-range/site/purchasing organization Vendor sub-range/purchasing organization Site/purchasing organization level Purchasing organization

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Vendor

Figure 18: Vendor: Vendor Sub-Range

Vendor sub-ranges are specified by vendors. Reasons for creating sub-ranges include, for example: • • •

Different conditions Different addresses Different control data for requirements planning and purchase orders

In the vendor master, the purchasing data and partner roles can be created separately for each sub-range. The link between vendor and article is created using the purchasing info record. The article maintenance automatically creates and maintains the purchasing info record. Among other things, information is created about conditions, terms of delivery and payment agreements. Purchasing info records can provide default values when the purchase order is being created. An article is assigned to a sub-range in the purchasing view of the article (purchasing info record). A sorting number can also be assigned, to sort the articles in a purchase order in the standard vendor way.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

29

Unit 2: Business Partner

IRT310

Figure 19: Vendor: Supply Regions

In the vendor master purchasing data, you can choose which supply regions a vendor supplies. Each site can be assigned to one supply region. The system checks the supply regions of the vendor master when a purchase order is created for a site that is assigned to a supply region. If the vendor is not responsible for that particular region, the system issues a warning message. If supply regions have been created in the vendor master, the information is taken into account in the supply source determination of the purchasing.

30

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Vendor

Figure 20: Vendor: Partner Roles

Partner Functions For certain operative functions, you can use partner functions to create a link between the vendor and other credit-side master records. The corresponding partner functions must be defined in these master records. The partner functions created in the vendor master can be defaulted and used in purchase orders and contracts. Vendor Master Records: • •

Only one vendor master record is required if a vendor is also the order recipient, vendor, invoicing party and payee. Several vendor master records are required if these functions are distributed to different locations or companies. They are linked to each other by partner functions.

You can enter a contact person for each partner function. Partner functions allow you to assign different locations or companies to a vendor master record. Partner functions refer to different functions that a particular vendor may have in the business relationship with you.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

31

Unit 2: Business Partner

IRT310

Figure 21: Vendor: Vendor Account Groups

The account group is a template for creating vendor master records. The account group determines: • •

32

The data fields in the master record that are either hidden or displayed, and are either required entry or optional entry fields The number range for the vendor master

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

33

Lesson: Vendor

Exercise 2: Vendor Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Maintain vendor data • Find the Customizing settings that you require

Business Example The vendor Northern Milk offers you better conditions if you purchase its whole range of yoghurts. You create a vendor sub-range for these articles and maintain the relevant purchasing data in the vendor master.

Task 1: The vendor master record already exists in the system under the number R1TV03##. Familiarize yourself with the vendor data. 1.

Display all data of vendor R1TV03## (Display → Central). The company code is R300, and the responsible purchasing organization is also R300 too. Select all views (except for the withholding tax view).

2.

In which country and city is the vendor? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

3.

What is the language setting for the vendor? ______________________________________________________

4.

Find out which partner functions are still assigned to the vendor in addition to the mandatory “Vendor” function. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Task 2: You want to create a new sub-range for selected articles of vendor R1TV03##. 1.

Find out with which account group the vendor R1TV03## was created. ______________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

33

Unit 2: Business Partner

IRT310

2.

In Customizing, check that you can create purchasing data for this account group at vendor sub-range level.

3.

In the Purchasing Data of the vendor, create a new vendor sub-range GR## with the description “Yoghurt”. Hint: To do this, choose Vendor → Change

Task 3: For articles from the Yoghurt sub-range, the vendor named a certain seller, who is the contact person for this article. You now want to create this information in the system. 1.

Create alternative data for the Yoghurt vendor sub-range.

2.

On what other levels can you create alternative data? _________________________________________________

34

3.

You select your sub-range GR## and maintain the following alternative purchasing data: The responsible seller for the article of the VSR is Mr Smith and his telephone number is 089/23046-7. You want to specify the purchasing group R30 as a default when creating the article. The planned delivery time is 3 days.

4.

Save the changes you have made to the vendor.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Vendor

Solution 2: Vendor Task 1: The vendor master record already exists in the system under the number R1TV03##. Familiarize yourself with the vendor data. 1.

Display all data of vendor R1TV03## (Display → Central). The company code is R300, and the responsible purchasing organization is also R300 too. Select all views (except for the withholding tax view). a)

b) 2.

Retailing: Master Data → Vendor Data → Edit Vendors → Vendor → Display → Central Vendor

R1TV03##

Company Code

R300

Purch. Organization

R300

Select all boxes (except for Withholding tax) and choose Enter

In which country and city is the vendor? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

3.

Go to the Address view, and the Street Address subscreen Country

USA

City

Town

What is the language setting for the vendor? ______________________________________________________ a)

Go to the Address view, and the Communication subscreen Language

4.

English

Find out which partner functions are still assigned to the vendor in addition to the mandatory “Vendor” function. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

Goto → Purchasing org.data → Partner functions Other partner functions are Ordering Address and Invoicing Party. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

35

Unit 2: Business Partner

IRT310

Task 2: You want to create a new sub-range for selected articles of vendor R1TV03##. 1.

Find out with which account group the vendor R1TV03## was created. ______________________________________________________ a)

Extras→ Administrative data The vendor was created with the account group 0001 Vendor.

2.

In Customizing, check that you can create purchasing data for this account group at vendor sub-range level. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Business Partner → Vendors → Control → Define Account Groups and Field Selection (Vendor)

b)

Select group 0001

c)

Choose Details In the Data Retent. Levels: Purchasing subscreen, the Vendor sub-range relevant checkbox is selected, which means that data can be created at this level. Do not change this selection.

Continued on next page

36

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Vendor

3.

In the Purchasing Data of the vendor, create a new vendor sub-range GR## with the description “Yoghurt”. Hint: To do this, choose Vendor → Change a)

Retailing: Master Data → Vendor Data → Edit Vendors → Vendor → Change → Central Vendor

R1TV03##

Company Code

R300

Purch. Organization

R300

b)

Select the Purchasing data checkbox and chooseEnter

c)

In the Purchasing data view: choose Extras → Vendor Sub-ranges

d)

Sub-range

GR##

VSR description

Yogurt

Select the green arrow to return to the purchasing data

Task 3: For articles from the Yoghurt sub-range, the vendor named a certain seller, who is the contact person for this article. You now want to create this information in the system. 1.

2.

Create alternative data for the Yoghurt vendor sub-range. a)

Choose Alternative data

b)

Answer the query with YES

On what other levels can you create alternative data? _________________________________________________ a)

Alternative data can also be maintained at site level.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

37

Unit 2: Business Partner

3.

IRT310

You select your sub-range GR## and maintain the following alternative purchasing data: The responsible seller for the article of the VSR is Mr Smith and his telephone number is 089/23046-7. You want to specify the purchasing group R30 as a default when creating the article. The planned delivery time is 3 days. a) Sub-range b)

4.

In the Alternative Data subscreen, select the Purchasing Data checkbox and choose Enter Vendor

Mr Smith

Telephone number

089/23046-7

Purchasing group

R30

Planned Delivery Time

3

Save the changes you have made to the vendor. a)

38

GR##

Choose Vendor → Save

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Vendor

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the structure of a vendor master record • Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

39

Unit Summary

IRT310

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Name the different customer categories • Describe the structure of a customer master record • Describe the structure of a vendor master record • Explain how you can maintain various types of purchasing data for the vendor

40

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 3 Sites

41

Unit Overview This unit describes the concept of the site profile and the corresponding reference sites, specifies how sites can be subdivided, explains the department store/shop concept and the space management function, and describes how blocking reasons are set and how they work.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • •

Describe the structure of sites Name the various site categories Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs to the profile Create a site List the ways you can subdivide sites Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work Describe the structure of a layout concept Explain the space management function Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

Unit Contents Lesson: Sites ..................................................................... 43 Exercise 3: Sites............................................................. 49 Lesson: Site Maintenance ...................................................... 55 Exercise 4: Creating a Site................................................. 63

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

41

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Exercise 5: Department Store and Shop Maintenance................. 69 Lesson: Layout ................................................................... 73 Exercise 6: Layout .......................................................... 79

42

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 42

Lesson: Sites

Sites Lesson Duration: 60 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Describe the structure of sites Name the various site categories Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs to the profile

Building on the Customer and Vendor lessons, the site master record is now explained. It is important that the participants are already able to differentiate between external and internal customers and vendors.

Business Example You plan on changing the product presentation of your stores. All your company’s stores should look the same to customers and should carry the same merchandise categories and articles. The store is undergoing renovation and will have to close temporarily.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

43

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

The Structure of Sites

Figure 22: Sites: Basic Categories

Figure 23: Sites: Site and Distribution Chain Categories

The distribution chain category describes the logistical function of a distribution chain. In retail, a distinction is made between consumer distribution chains and distribution chains that are delivered by distribution centers. In SAP Retail, a distinction is also made between two site categories: • •

44

Distribution centers that provide goods for other sites or customers Stores that present merchandise and sell it to consumers

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Sites

A site is always a combination of the site master and the customer master. • • •

The site master is required as it is an inventory-management organizational unit with own requirements planning. A site is also a customer as sales functions, such as deliveries and billing, are carried out for it from a central viewpoint. A distribution center (DC) is also a vendor as it supplies other sites with merchandise. A distribution center delivers merchandise to stores of one or more distribution chains.

A distribution center has to be assigned to a distribution chain. A store is always assigned to a specific distribution chain and may be supplied by distribution centers via several distribution chains.

Figure 24: Sites: Structure

As a site is also always a customer in the SAP System, all the customer functions can be used. In the site profile in Customizing, you can choose to hide functions. The following can be partner functions of a site: • • • •

Sold-to party Ship-to party Bill-to party Payer

One storage location is assigned to each store for inventory management. Distribution centers can have more than one storage location. The storage location provides a link to the Warehouse Management System.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

45

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

A store can be subdivided into departments according to retail business aspects. A department can be defined for each store and merchandise category. Departments can be assigned to a receiving point. One of the unloading points can be assigned to each receiving point. The merchant ID, which you can assign to a store, is used to settle credit card sales (for example, American Express, Visa Card) with the relevant clearing houses. You can also assign time and merchandise category-related supplying sites to a store.

Organizational Structures in Retail

Figure 25: Organizational Structures in Retail (Example)

When assigning sites to distribution chains, differentiate between: • •

The organizational assignment in the site master basic data view (unbroken line). The distribution chain, which supplies a site, in the site master customer data (dotted line).

Franchise partners are always displayed as independent sites (for logistical purposes) and with a separate company code (for billing purposes). You can create different sales units and sales prices for an article in each distribution channel.

46

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Sites

Site Profiles

Figure 26: Sites: Site Profiles (1/2)

Figure 27: Sites: Site Profiles (2/2)

The data that are required or possible in the site master record are defined in the site profile.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

47

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Site profiles subdivide the site categories and control the site maintenance interface. This is carried out when the site category is assigned and the field status is maintained. The account group controls the screen structure for the customer and vendor segment in the site master. You can also use the transaction-based field selection to control the field status and the screen structure of the general site master data. The following list of priorities determines whether a field, or the contents of a field, is displayed or hidden in a transaction: • •

Hiding a field is the top priority. This is followed by display, required entry and optional entry fields.

To create a new site, you can also enter a reference site in the site profile. The copy rule determines the Customizing tables that are to be copied from the reference site to the new site. Templates can also be entered for the customer and, if necessary, for the vendor master record. Various site profiles, which you can copy and adjust according to your requirements, have already been delivered. There is no number range for sites. Numbers are assigned externally. As a rule, customers and vendors that belong to a site receive the same key as the corresponding site. However, for customers and vendors there are number ranges that are determined via the respective account group. When a new customer or vendor is created for the site, a check is carried out against these number ranges.

48

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

49

Lesson: Sites

Exercise 3: Sites Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a new site profile as a copy of an existing profile • Find and implement the functions for hiding fields in a site profile • Implement the transaction-dependent definition of required entry fields

Business Example You want to create several stores for your distribution chain. To minimize the amount of work involved, all stores should be created with the same templates. The employee creating the stores must maintain certain fields immediately.

Task 1: You familiarize yourself with the site profile settings. You create your own site profile so that you can use your template to create a new site. 1.

Create a new site profile with the number P2## as a copy of profile P160.

2.

You want to use your new site profiles to create stores. Select the relevant site category.

3.

For which three areas can you enter templates? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

4.

What does the copy rule determine (F1 Help)? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

5.

There is a function which you can use to hide fields, among other things. How do you navigate to this function? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

6.

The Block Reason and Blocking period fields should be hidden in the sites that you create with your new profile. Make this change and save. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

49

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Task 2: Also depending on the transaction you are using (Create, Change, Display), the fields in the site master can be defined as required entry, optional entry, display, or hidden fields. 1.

Find out whether the Sales area (floor space) field (in the Layout data area) must be maintained when you create a new site.

Task 3: You can now define the tables that should be copied from the reference site when a new site is created. 1.

To do this, use the copy rule used in the site profile. Which copy rule does your site profile P2## use? ______________________________________________________

2.

Find out which tables are assigned to this copy rule. ______________________________________________________

50

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Sites

Solution 3: Sites Task 1: You familiarize yourself with the site profile settings. You create your own site profile so that you can use your template to create a new site. 1.

2.

Create a new site profile with the number P2## as a copy of profile P160. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Plant Master → Control Data → Site Profiles

b)

Select site profile P160

c)

Edit → Copy as ...:

You want to use your new site profiles to create stores. Select the relevant site category. a)

3.

Site category for stores: A

For which three areas can you enter templates? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

4.

The three possible areas are site, customer and vendor.

What does the copy rule determine (F1 Help)? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

5.

The copy rule determines which tables should be copied from the reference site to the new site.

There is a function which you can use to hide fields, among other things. How do you navigate to this function? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

In the site profile maintenance: choose FieldStat. site

b)

Warning message “The site profile of the template is P160” appears. Choose Enter to confirm it

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

51

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

6.

The Block Reason and Blocking period fields should be hidden in the sites that you create with your new profile. Make this change and save. a)

Double-click the Block group

b)

Hide the Block Reason and Blocking period fields (set the radio button)

c)

Field status → Save

Task 2: Also depending on the transaction you are using (Create, Change, Display), the fields in the site master can be defined as required entry, optional entry, display, or hidden fields. 1.

Find out whether the Sales area (floor space) field (in the Layout data area) must be maintained when you create a new site. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Plant Master → Control Data → Transaction-Dependent Field Selection

b)

Select Create plant

c)

Choose Details

d)

Choose FieldStat. site

e)

Double-click the Layout data group The Sales area (floor space) field is an optional entry field, so it does not have to be entered.

Task 3: You can now define the tables that should be copied from the reference site when a new site is created. 1.

To do this, use the copy rule used in the site profile. Which copy rule does your site profile P2## use? ______________________________________________________ a)

IMG: Logistics → General → Plant Master → Control Data → Plant Profiles

b)

Double-click the P2## profile Your profile uses the copy rule 01.

2.

Find out which tables are assigned to this copy rule.

Continued on next page

52

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Sites

______________________________________________________

2006/Q2

a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Plant Master → Control Data → Define Copy Rule and Assign to Tables

b)

Select row 01 Maximum rule and double-click Table assignment

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

53

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the structure of sites • Name the various site categories • Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs to the profile

54

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 55

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Site Maintenance Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Create a site List the ways you can subdivide sites Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work

The last lesson dealt mainly with Customizing, in other words the prerequisites for creating a new site. This lesson deals with actually creating a new site.

Business Example You plan on changing the product presentation of your stores. All your company’s stores should look the same to customers and should carry the same merchandise categories and articles. The store is undergoing renovation, which means that it will close temporarily.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

55

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Subdivision of Stores with Departments

Figure 28: Sites: Site Subdivisions

A store may have several unloading points. The carrier brings the goods to this unloading point. A store has several departments. The department can be defined for each store and merchandise category. When there is a delivery to a store, for each article you can determine for which department the delivery item is determined. The store also has several receiving points. One of the unloading points is assigned to each receiving point. One receiving point can be assigned to each department (example: department stores). The unloading point of a store is maintained in the customer master data of the store.

56

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Figure 29: Sites: Unloading Point - Receiving Point - Department

You create departments (in Customizing) which you will assign to sites within your company at a later stage. As a rule, departments are assigned to stores. You can then assign the departments, which are assigned to the store, to the individual merchandise categories. A merchandise category cannot be assigned to more than one department. However, several (different) merchandise categories can be assigned to one department. When assigning the departments to the stores, you can assign a receiving point to each department in the site maintenance. Only one receiving point can be assigned to a department. However, several (different) departments can be assigned to one receiving point. Your receiving points are assigned to the defined unloading points. A receiving point can only be assigned to one unloading point. However, several (different) receiving points can be assigned to an unloading point. Unloading points must already have been created in the customer view of the site.

Department Stores and Shops The store categories Department Store and Shop are enhancements to the site master in ECC 6.0. A separate transaction is used to create each store category.

The store categories Department Store and Shop were added to the site category Store for the department store/shop concept. The target groups are retail companies that want to perform detailed inventory management at department level.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

57

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

If you want to process the departments in a store as independently operating units, you must define them as shops (site category Store, store category Shop). In this context, the department store is the organizational unit that covers the individual shops, and is created with the site category store and the store category department store. If you use the store categories Department Store and Shop, you can map multiple placements of articles in a site from an inventory management point of view. In this case, the system manages the stock in the individual shops.

Figure 30: Department Store/Shop Concept

The basic concept of the SAP site is unchanged for the store categories Department Store and Shop. All the processes in the standard (Retail) system are - in addition to the store level (Store Category:_) - also available at shop level (Store Category: Shop). This means the department store is fully integrated into the site master data model. Department Store and Shop are store categories that have a certain relationship in the site master data concept. If you create the site master data for a shop, for this shop you must select an assignment to the relevant department store. If you link a shop to a department store, the system can assign to the appropriate shop the data, which you processed at department store level. This reduces the time and effort involved in manual data entry at shop level.

58

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Figure 31: Creating a Department Store or Shop

The department store/shop model and the store model with departments are two different ways of managing articles. The department store/shop model manages the articles in more detail than the store model with departments, since the assortment is divided among the different shops and can only be used logistically within the shops. There are two user-friendly mass maintenance transactions that can be used to create shops. In one of the transactions, you start with the department store and create a number of shops. In the other transaction, you start with a category and create shops in several department stores for this category.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

59

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Blocking Sites

Figure 32: Sites: Blocking Reasons

Figure 33: Sites: Blocking Reasons

Example

60

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Due to renovations, a site will be blocked from May 01 - 31. The report run on May 1 will set the blocking reasons contained in the blocking reason (profile) as general blocks in the customer segment of the site. The report run on the May 31 removes these blocks again. In Customizing, you can define blocking reasons (blocking profile) for an order block, delivery block or billing block. You are able to block a site by assigning one of these blocking reasons to a site and specifying a time interval. On a daily basis, the background processing (report RWWLOCKD) checks whether there is a blocking reason for a site, and sets central blocks (delivery blocks, billing blocks and order blocks) in accordance with the blocking profile, if the sites should be blocked from the current date (Block from), or removes the blocks for the current date (Block to). Blocks are always related to customer segments.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

61

Unit 3: Sites

62

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

61

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Exercise 4: Creating a Site Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a site with your site profile • Create a customer for your site

Business Example You will soon be opening a new store and creating the relevant master record.

Task: For the new store you use the site profile, which you have already maintained in the Sites lesson with the settings you wanted. Alternatively, you can use the site profile P160. 1.

Use the site profile P2## or P160 to create the site RF##. Do not enter a reference site. Determine the reference site from the site profile.

2.

Your site belongs to company code R300, purchasing organization R300 and sales area RG10/R1/R1. The sales area is a combination of sales organization, distribution chain and division. The address is GM Store Gr##, Long Street 100 in 94124 San Francisco. The country key is US and the language is English. Your new store has a sales area of 1000 m².

3.

From where is the existing data in the new store defaulted? ______________________________________________________ Copy all other data that the system has defaulted.

4.

Choose the relevant button to go to the customer. Which number is defaulted for the customer of the site? ______________________________________________________

5.

Which account group is used to create the customer and from where does the system determine the account group? ______________________________________________________

6.

Confirm the individual customer views and take a closer look at them. Once the last customer view is displayed, the system automatically goes back to the site master data. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

63

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

7.

As a rule, your new store is supplied by distribution center R7##. Assign this distribution center to your store as a supplying site and save. You receive a query regarding copying classification data of the store. Choose No in response to this query.

8.

64

Once you have saved, the system takes you to the Customizing data that is to be copied. Confirm this by selecting the appropriate button.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Solution 4: Creating a Site Task: For the new store you use the site profile, which you have already maintained in the Sites lesson with the settings you wanted. Alternatively, you can use the site profile P160. 1.

Use the site profile P2## or P160 to create the site RF##. Do not enter a reference site. Determine the reference site from the site profile. a)

b) 2.

Retail: Master Data → Site Data → Site → Create Site

RF##

Site profile

P2##/P160

Choose YES to confirm the query

Your site belongs to company code R300, purchasing organization R300 and sales area RG10/R1/R1. The sales area is a combination of sales organization, distribution chain and division.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

65

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

The address is GM Store Gr##, Long Street 100 in 94124 San Francisco. The country key is US and the language is English. Your new store has a sales area of 1000 m². a)

b)

Go to the Organization/calendar tab Company code

R300

Purch.Organization

R300

Sales organization

RG10

Distribution channel

R1

Division

R1

Calendar

Factory calendar US standard

Address tab Address

GM Store Gr## Long Street 100 94124 San Francisco

c)

Country

US

Language

English

Go to the Layout/blocks tab Sales Area

3.

1,000 m²

From where is the existing data in the new store defaulted? ______________________________________________________ Copy all other data that the system has defaulted. a)

4.

The available data is defaulted from the reference site.

Choose the relevant button to go to the customer. Which number is defaulted for the customer of the site? ______________________________________________________ a)

Choose Customer The same key is defaulted for the customer as was defaulted for the store: RT## Continued on next page

66

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Site Maintenance

5.

Which account group is used to create the customer and from where does the system determine the account group? ______________________________________________________ a)

6.

Confirm the individual customer views and take a closer look at them. Once the last customer view is displayed, the system automatically goes back to the site master data. a)

7.

P160 is defaulted from the site profile as the account group for creating the customer.

Confirm each view by choosing Enter.

As a rule, your new store is supplied by distribution center R7##. Assign this distribution center to your store as a supplying site and save. You receive a query regarding copying classification data of the store. Choose No in response to this query. a)

In the site master, choose Supplying Sites. Supplying site

b) 8.

Site → Save

Once you have saved, the system takes you to the Customizing data that is to be copied. Confirm this by selecting the appropriate button. a)

2006/Q2

R7##

Choose Confirm in the Customizing tables view.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

67

Unit 3: Sites

68

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

67

Lesson: Site Maintenance

Exercise 5: Department Store and Shop Maintenance Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a new shop for the department store

Business Example In addition to your stores, you also have large department stores in which you manage stock at department level. A new department for children’s fashion is opened in a department store of this kind.

Task: You create a new shop for an existing department store RD##.

2006/Q2

1.

Display your department store RD##. You can navigate to the assigned shops by choosing Display Assortments. Which shops are already assigned to the department store?

2.

You now create a new shop RK## Fashion Shop Kids for your department store RD##.

3.

The articles from Category R3053 are assigned to the shop. It will be opened this day next week.

4.

The shop is on the first floor of the department store and has a sales area of 350m². 4 employees are working in the shop this year. Maintain this information in the detail data for the shop.

5.

Save the shop you have just created.

6.

In the background, a site master is created for the shop. You can display this site master by choosing Environment → Display Plant Master. Organizational data is already assigned to the shop. Where does this data come from?

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

69

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Solution 5: Department Store and Shop Maintenance Task: You create a new shop for an existing department store RD##. 1.

Display your department store RD##. You can navigate to the assigned shops by choosing Display Assortments. Which shops are already assigned to the department store? a)

Retailing → Master Data → Site Data → Department Store/Shop → Display Department Store/Shop Site

RD##

Site, general b)

Display Assortments The shops RM## and RW## are already assigned.

2.

You now create a new shop RK## Fashion Shop Kids for your department store RD##. a)

Retailing → Master Data → Site Data → Department Store/Shop → Create Shops via Department Store Dept St.

RD##

Enter b)

3.

Shop

RK##

Shop Name

Fashion Shop Kids

The articles from Category R3053 are assigned to the shop. It will be opened this day next week. a)

b)

Category

R3053

Opening date

One week from today

Select Set Up Shop Data Continued on next page

70

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Site Maintenance

4.

The shop is on the first floor of the department store and has a sales area of 350m². 4 employees are working in the shop this year. Maintain this information in the detail data for the shop. a)

Choose Det. Maint Floor

1

Sales area

350 m²

Employee

4

In

Current year

Choose [F3] to go back to the shop overview. 5.

Save the shop you have just created. a)

6.

Shops →Save (Online)

In the background, a site master is created for the shop. You can display this site master by choosing Environment → Display Plant Master. Organizational data is already assigned to the shop. Where does this data come from? a)

Environment → Plant Master Enter The shop data was copied from the relevant department store.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

71

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a site • List the ways you can subdivide sites • Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work

72

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 71

Lesson: Layout

Layout Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview The layout concept allows you to optimally structure the sales area of your stores in connection with your assortment. At the same time, it forms the basis for using space management systems.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Describe the structure of a layout concept Explain the space management function Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

Advise the participants that the use of the layout and space management functions are optional.

Business Example You want to increase the recognition value of your stores among customers, and so you define certain sort criteria, according to which the articles should be presented in the store.

The Layout Concept You can assign layouts to the assortments of a store.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

73

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Figure 34: Sites: Layout Concept

Every layout consists of layout modules that represent a fixed area in a store (for example, a shelf). The layout area represents the spatial assignment of a layout module in the layout. An article can be assigned from the article maintenance to one or several layout modules. The layout modules can be assigned to one or more layouts. The layout can determine how the assortment list is sorted. For the time planning, you can use the layout module versions with various validity periods. In a layout module, the validity periods for individual versions are unique and cannot overlap. Due to the time-based scheduling of the layout modules in versions, you can, for example, map seasonal changes in a shelf.

74

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Layout

Figure 35: Layout Module Versions

The fixture can enhance the layout concept, so that you can arrange your assortments according to their position. It displays your goods on the sales area provided. You can only place a limited number of fixtures on the sales floor provided. Fixtures are assigned to layout module versions. You can fill a fixture differently depending on the layout module version, and you can assign it to a layout module version several times. In the system this is mapped with an assignment number. If you assign each fixture to a layout module version only once, the assignment number is irrelevant. To allow different capacities to be maintained differently for one and the same fixture for each layout module, the capacity is specified when a fixture is assigned to the layout module version. In this case, the system first proposes the default capacity of the fixture that is defined in the basic data. A layout module version is made up of one or more fixtures. The measurements of a fixture are irrelevant. Therefore, one or more fixtures are always assigned to a layout module version, regardless of the fixture measurements. The existing information of the shelf section is replaced by the fixture ID when articles are assigned to layout module versions. Fixtures are designed to be as flexible as possible, in order to give the users different ways of managing the shelf. The assignment of fixtures to the layout module version is only available in the layout module version maintenance, but not in the fixture master. Hint: If you want to use fixtures in your operational processes, you must set this in the Customizing. You cannot reverse this selection.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

75

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

Since stores generally carry thousands of articles, it can take a lot of time and effort to assign layout modules and assortments to the stores and to create the corresponding listing conditions in the host system. It also takes a lot of time and effort to make changes to individual store layout modules, but this can be avoided in a lot of cases. In particular in the case of stores, the assortments of which are similar (but not identical), you can use layout module variants to greatly simplify these processes.

Figure 36: Layout Module Variants

A layout module variant can be understood as a sort of "exception module". You create a module variant of this kind to include certain articles in a layout module version or to remove certain articles from a layout module version. Layout module variants cannot be used alone; they are to be used in connection with a layout module version. Therefore, they serve as "modifiers" for the layout modules in question. Normally, module variants are assigned to sites that differ from the standard assortment least. There is no limit to the number of changes a module variant can contain. The number of articles that have just been added does not have to correspond to the number of articles that have been removed.

76

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Layout

Figure 37: Sites: Procedure for Integrated Layout Maintenance

Figure 38: Space Management - Integration

Space management optimizes the placement of an article on a shelf from a business viewpoint. In this case, key figures are defined, and the position of an article should be optimized according these key figures. This usually concerns sales data and revenue data, or the gross margin. If there is not a suitable interface for space management: • • • •

2006/Q2

Data is maintained twice Space management is not integrated into relevant business processes New articles are not included in the planning process Optimization results are not used

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

77

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

This interface guarantees regular data interchange and ensures that the space management program is provided with the most up-to-date data, and that space management is included in all relevant business processes. When activities, for which space management is relevant, are carried out in SAP Retail (for example, a new article is included in the assortment and is assigned to a shelf), the interface is triggered - partly by a workflow, or automatically - which means that you are guaranteed that it is immediately taken into account in the space management program and data inconsistencies are avoided. The optimized data can then be used again in SAP Retail, for example, the optimized shelf quantities can be used in listing.

78

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

77

Lesson: Layout

Exercise 6: Layout Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create layouts and assign stores

Business Example You created a new store. For the effect of recognition, the articles in this store should be presented in the same sequence they are presented in existing stores.

Task: Since some additional articles are carried in your store, you create a new layout on the basis of existing data, and you enhance this layout according to your requirements. 1.

In the layout module maintenance, create the new layout module ##01 with the description Confectionary GR## and the layout module ##02 should have description Beverages GR## :

2.

You now want to fill your layout module with articles. Call the Layout Workbench and display your layout module Confectionery GR## . Which versions already exist for your module and for how long are these versions valid? ___________________________________________

3.

In version 0000, you include some articles from merchandise category RS11310 Cookies/Crackers. Select all articles with the unit of measure EA for the assignment.

4.

Now copy a separate layout L## as a copy of layout FOOD with the description Layout Group##. Save your layout and confirm the information message.

5.

Add the modules ##01 and ##02 to your new layout L##. To do this, use the right side of the screen and choose Layout Modules.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

79

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

6.

Can a layout module appear more than once in a layout?

7.

Can an area appear more than once in a layout?

8.

What do you do if you want to replace an existing assigned layout module with another?

9.

In the layout maintenance, you realize that a layout module is missing. Where can you create this layout module now from the layout maintenance?

10. Assign layout L## to store R1##. 11. The layout module ##01 receives a second version that is valid from the 21st to the 28th of the following month. Copy version 0000 with all the articles that belong to it. Which status do you select for the version? _____________________________________________________ What is the version number created for this layout module? _____________________________________________________

80

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Layout

Solution 6: Layout Task: Since some additional articles are carried in your store, you create a new layout on the basis of existing data, and you enhance this layout according to your requirements. 1.

In the layout module maintenance, create the new layout module ##01 with the description Confectionary GR## and the layout module ##02 should have description Beverages GR## : a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Layout → Layout Module Maintenance

b)

Table View → Change → Display

c)

Choose New Entries:

d) 2.

Layout Module

##01

Description

Confectionery GR##

Layout Module

##02

Description

Confectionery GR##

Table View → Save

You now want to fill your layout module with articles. Call the Layout Workbench and display your layout module Confectionery GR## . Which versions already exist for your module and for how long are these versions valid? ___________________________________________ a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Layout → Layout Workbench

b)

Program → Execute

c)

Go to the Start: Layout Modules tab

d)

Layout module ##01 Version 0000 was automatically created with the validity period from today to December 31, 9999.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

81

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

3.

4.

5.

6.

In version 0000, you include some articles from merchandise category RS11310 Cookies/Crackers. Select all articles with the unit of measure EA for the assignment. a)

Expand layout module ##01 and click version 0000.

b)

Select Assign Materials

c)

Enter merchandise category RS11310 on the By Material tab and choose F8

d)

Select the Unit of Measure column and choose Sort in Ascending Order

e)

Select some of the articles with the unit of measure EA

f)

Choose Assign

g)

Enter

h)

Save and exit the Layout Workbench.

Now copy a separate layout L## as a copy of layout FOOD with the description Layout Group##. Save your layout and confirm the information message. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Layout → Layout Maintenance

b)

Table View → Display → Change

c)

Select FOOD and Edit → Copy with Assignments to layout: L##

d)

Table View → Save

e)

Confirm the information message by choosing Enter.

Add the modules ##01 and ##02 to your new layout L##. To do this, use the right side of the screen and choose Layout Modules. a)

Select L## and choose Update.

b)

In the lower half of the screen on the right-hand side, select layout modules ##01 and ##02, and choose Assign.

Can a layout module appear more than once in a layout? Answer: Yes, but always with different layout areas.

7.

Can an area appear more than once in a layout? Answer: No, unique numbers are assigned automatically in sequence.

Continued on next page

82

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Layout

8.

What do you do if you want to replace an existing assigned layout module with another? Answer: You can choose Replace to replace a layout module with another in one or more layouts. Caution: the result is visible only after you save.

9.

In the layout maintenance, you realize that a layout module is missing. Where can you create this layout module now from the layout maintenance? a)

Choose Layout Module Maintenance

b)

Go to the Start: Layout Modules tab

c)

Layout Module ##01

d)

Program → Execute

e)

Select L##

f)

Layout Areas button

g)

Choose New Entries Use consecutive numbers for the areas (for example, Area 1 = Module ##01)

10. Assign layout L## to store R1##. a)

In the layout maintenance, choose the Stores tab

b)

Select L## and choose Update.

c)

Select store R1## and choose Assign.

d)

If the following query is displayed: The layout XYZ is assigned to site F1##. Do you want to replace it? Confirm by choosing Yes.

e)

Table View → Save

f)

Table View → Exit

11. The layout module ##01 receives a second version that is valid from the 21st to the 28th of the following month. Copy version 0000 with all the articles that belong to it. Which status do you select for the version? _____________________________________________________ What is the version number created for this layout module?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

83

Unit 3: Sites

IRT310

_____________________________________________________

84

a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Layout → Maintenance of Layout Module Version

b)

Layout module ##01

c)

Program → Execute

d)

Table → Display → Change

e)

Select the layout module and choose Edit → Copy with Article Assignments.

f)

Answer the query Do you want to copy the layout module version? by choosing Yes.

g)

End date of the last version: 20th of the following month

h)

In version 0001, enter the 28th of the following month in the Valid To column.

i)

Table → Save

j)

Table → Exit

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Layout

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the structure of a layout concept • Explain the space management function • Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

85

Unit Summary

IRT310

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the structure of sites • Name the various site categories • Describe the concept of the site profile and the reference site that belongs to the profile • Create a site • List the ways you can subdivide sites • Describe how you can set blocking reasons and how blocking reasons work • Describe the structure of a layout concept • Explain the space management function • Use the layout workbench to maintain layouts

86

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 4 Article Groupings

85

This unit introduces the various ways you can group articles. When you group articles, you must set up a merchandise category hierarchy. The article hierarchy is optional. The relevant lessons specify the difference between the material group hierarchy and the article hierarchy.

Unit Overview This unit explains the different ways in which articles can be grouped, and presents the elements of the classification as the basis of the merchandise category hierarchy. It describes how to create merchandise category hierarchies and article hierarchies. It also names the controls that are linked with the merchandise category in the site.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • •

2006/Q2

Explain the basic terms of the classification Describe the class types used in SAP Retail Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category value-only and merchandise category reference articles Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in the site Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make the necessary settings for it Describe the objective of the article hierarchy Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a time-dependent basis

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

87

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Unit Contents Lesson: Classification ........................................................... 89 Lesson: Merchandise Categories.............................................. 96 Exercise 7: Merchandise Categories ....................................103 Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories........ 113 Exercise 8: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories 117 Lesson: Article Hierarchy ......................................................122 Exercise 9: Article Hierarchy ..............................................131

88

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 87

Lesson: Classification

Classification Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview This lesson explains how classification elements form the basis of the merchandise category hierarchy.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Explain the basic terms of the classification Describe the class types used in SAP Retail

The classification is a tool from the SAP standard, which you can use to group different objects (including sites or customers) within the SAP system. The classification forms the basis for the merchandise categories.

Business Example You include various new merchandise categories in your assortment. Therefore, you need a new merchandise category hierarchy that you want to include in your existing hierarchy. Since the merchandise category hierarchy in the SAP system is stored in the class system, this topic is now treated as a prerequisite.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

89

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Example of a Merchandise Category Hierarchy

Figure 39: Merchandise Category Hierarchy (Example)

A merchandise category hierarchy always consists of a top node and hierarchy levels arranged under this node. Each merchandise category can be assigned to one merchandise category hierarchy level. There is no limit on the number of hierarchy levels that can be created. Within a merchandise category hierarchy, the merchandise category of an article is always the lowest merchandise category hierarchy level. Articles are always assigned to the merchandise categories, and never to the hierarchy levels.

90

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Classification

Classification

Figure 40: Classification: Terms

Figure 41: Classification: Terms

A class (classification system) is a group of similar objects described by their common characteristics. Among other things, objects can be articles, batches and documents.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

91

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

The class type is a class that has been subdivided according to various objects and organizational areas. In the classes that belong to a class type, there are only objects of one type, for example, sites. The class type controls, among other things, whether multiple assignments of a site or site groups respectively to other groups are allowed or not. Any number of hierarchy levels can be created in the classification. When you set up a class hierarchy, the characteristics of the higher-level classes are also inherited by the lower classes. Inherited characteristics are flagged with a special indicator. You can use this indicator to show from which class a characteristic has been inherited. Characteristic inheritance is the transfer of a characteristic and its values to all the lower classes in the class hierarchy. The characteristic and characteristic values areas are handled in more detail in the Characteristics lesson, which is a prerequisite for the Generic Article lesson.

Assignment to Applications

Figure 42: Classification: Applications

92

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Classification

A class type is specified for each application, and in the classification system there is a certain article or site grouping behind each class type. This setting specifies which class types are actually used, for example, by an application running on site groups. Example: The allocation table can use site groups. In this case, these site groups group sites, for which supply is to be guaranteed, into one group. The allocation table then uses such class types that are assigned to the application “03 Promotion and Allocation Table”. The site groups of the relevant class types in the classification system must be maintained as a prerequisite for this.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

93

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Facilitated Discussion Summarize classification

Discussion Questions Use the following questions to engage the participants in the discussion. Feel free to use your own additional questions. Summarize the classification as a basis for the following topics.

94

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Classification

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the basic terms of the classification • Describe the class types used in SAP Retail

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

95

Unit 4: Article Groupings

Lesson: 92

IRT310

Merchandise Categories Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category value-only and merchandise category reference articles

A merchandise category hierarchy must be set up in SAP Retail. There must be exactly one merchandise category hierarchy in the system, in which all articles are eventually organized. An article cannot be created without reference to the merchandise category.

Business Example You include various new merchandise categories in your assortment. Therefore, you need a new merchandise category hierarchy that you want to include in your existing hierarchy.

Merchandise Category Hierarchy

Figure 43: Merchandise Category Hierarchies: Definitions

Merchandise category hierarchies are formed when individual hierarchy levels are assigned or connected. There is no limit on the number of hierarchy levels you can define.

96

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

There are two types of hierarchy levels: • •

Merchandise categories: You can only assign articles and, if necessary, characteristics profiles to merchandise categories Merchandise category hierarchy levels: You can only assign merchandise categories or other merchandise category hierarchy levels to merchandise category hierarchy levels

You can assign a merchandise category reference article to every merchandise category. You can then use it as a template when you create articles. A reference article can be assigned to more than one merchandise category. The merchandise category reference article is not transferred to POS systems, and therefore cannot be an article that is used operatively. You can also create and assign a merchandise category value-only article for each merchandise category, which makes inventory management on a value-only basis possible at merchandise category level. The merchandise category value-only article can be used for merchandise category transactions at the POS. A merchandise category hierarchy value-only article can also be defined for each hierarchy level.

Figure 44: Merchandise Category Hierarchies: Characteristics

Characteristics can be assigned to hierarchy levels as well as merchandise categories. The lower hierarchy levels inherit the characteristics that are assigned to the higher hierarchy levels. Characteristics profiles are created below the merchandise category. They are used for the specialization/segmentation of the merchandise category and its characteristics. Several characteristics are included in a characteristics profile.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

97

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

You can assign more than one characteristics profile to a merchandise category. In turn, a characteristics profile can be assigned to more than one merchandise category. Every article must be assigned to exactly one merchandise category, and can also be assigned to a characteristics profile. The characteristics profile is only important as a bearer of certain characteristic values during the creation of articles or variants. Otherwise, it has no operational effect in the Retail system as a whole. It is not important in the Logistics or Retail Information System and it does not carry any other information.

Customizing Settings In the general control for Retail master data, you define parameters that are important for different SAP Retail subfunctions on a client basis. In the merchandise category control, you can set whether or not the system should issue a warning message when you are creating an article, if no reference article is assigned to the merchandise category for which the article is being created. You can also specify a default valuation class that influences the general ledger account determination for an article.

How to Create a Merchandise Category Hierarchy

Figure 45: Merchandise Categories: Creating a Hierarchy

You create new merchandise category hierarchies by adjusting the basic data. The maintenance of all the other views is optional. Next, you need to assign the merchandise category hierarchy levels one under another in the correct sequence (top-down assignment).

98

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

You can create merchandise categories by adjusting the basic data of the merchandise category and the merchandise category value-only article. This happens for merchandise category value-only articles and merchandise category reference articles in the article maintenance. You assign a merchandise category hierarchy level to the merchandise category. If necessary, you assign characteristics profiles to the merchandise category. You can create characteristics for merchandise categories, hierarchy levels or other objects. You can choose the validity period of the characteristic. You change the basic data of the characteristic. If you want to assign a characteristic to a merchandise category or a merchandise category hierarchy level, note that the characteristics are assigned to the merchandise categories via the merchandise category maintenance. The assigned characteristics will be inherited.

Reclassification

Figure 46: Merchandise Categories: Reclassification

Changing the assignment of an article or a merchandise category within the merchandise category hierarchy is known as ’reclassification’. You may need to change assignments for the following reasons: • •

•

•

2006/Q2

When an article was created, it was assigned to the wrong merchandise category due to an input error. Articles, which have turned out to be special articles in a merchandise category, must be assigned to a special merchandise category. For example, expensive cheeses in the Dairy Products merchandise category should be reassigned to the Delicatessen merchandise category. A merchandise category or merchandise category hierarchy level is too large, and therefore is not manageable and needs to be divided up. Articles or merchandise categories in the old level are reassigned to a new one. You want to restructure objects against the background of the Efficient Consumer Response (ECR) or the introduction of Category Management.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

99

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

The SAP system gives you two reclassification options: • •

If you want to make extensive changes, you can use Article and Merchandise Category Reclassification. If you just want to change the assignment of individual articles, rather than the assignment of whole article areas or existing merchandise categories, you should use the Article Reclassification function, which is simpler to use. Article reclassification is allowed for the Single Article, Generic Article with Variants and Structured Article article categories.

Figure 47: Merchandise Categories: Reclassification - Example

Possible reclassification processes: •

Reassigning Articles An article is assigned to another existing merchandise category. It is also possible to split a merchandise category by creating a new merchandise category and moving a number of articles from one merchandise category into this new one.

•

Reassigning Merchandise Categories Entire merchandise categories are moved across the same level in the hierarchy tree. All the elements and subtrees below the merchandise category are moved with them.

•

Reassigning Hierarchy Levels Entire merchandise category hierarchy levels are moved on the same level in the hierarchy tree and all the subordinate objects are moved with them (this includes merchandise category hierarchy nodes, merchandise categories, characteristics profiles, generic articles, articles and variants).

100

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

You can reclassify the Single article, Generic article and Structured article article categories. The generic article is moved with all its variants. The system runs many checks during reclassification, for example, whether characteristics and characteristic values have the same source and destination, whether stocks are available, and so on.

Figure 48: Merchandise Category Reclassification: Restrictions

The system: • • • • •

Makes assignments in the merchandise category hierarchy itself Assigns an article to the merchandise category Assigns open purchase order items to merchandise categories, if required Adjusts the assortment module assignment Adjusts an inventory-management value-only article of a merchandise category hierarchy level

You can create a reclassification version of selected objects for a certain date. In this case, the changes are not actually written to the database - the reclassification is merely simulated.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

101

Unit 4: Article Groupings

102

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

99

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Exercise 7: Merchandise Categories Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create merchandise category hierarchy levels and use the assignment function to create your own hierarchy

Business Example You want to extend your assortment. In a workshop, you and some colleagues have decided on the merchandise category structure you require.

Task 1: Look at the merchandise category hierarchy of SMART Retailer Inc. 1.

Display the hierarchy under the merchandise category object RS21000 (General Merchandise Structure). How many levels are directly below the first level? _______________________________________________________

2.

How can you recognize the merchandise category in this display? _______________________________________________________

3.

Must all merchandise categories be assigned to the same hierarchy level? _______________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

103

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Task 2: You want to use the following new structure for your sales goods. You create it and add it to the existing merchandise category hierarchy under the node (hierarchy level) RS21000:

Figure 49: New merchandise category hierarchy

1.

Create a merchandise category hierarchy level MCH10## with the description Furniture GR##.

2.

Then create the remaining merchandise category hierarchy levels Hierarchy Level

Description

MCH1##

House Gr##

MCH2##

Garden Gr##

Task 3: Now create the individual merchandise categories. 1.

Create merchandise category MC1## with the description Kitchen Gr.##. Assign the MC (merchandise category) reference article MC14201 to the merchandise category and then save the merchandise category.

2.

Create merchandise category MC2## with the description Living Gr.##. Assign the MC reference article MC14201 to the merchandise category and then save your merchandise category. Create a value-only article with the key W_MC2## for this merchandise category. The description of the value-only article is Value-only article Living Gr##. Do not change any other data. Save the value-only article.

3.

Create merchandise category MC3## with the description Garden furniture Gr.## and then save. Continued on next page

104

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Task 4: Now create the mapped structure from the merchandise category hierarchy levels and merchandise categories, and assign these under level RS21000 in the existing merchandise category hierarchy of the sample company. 1.

To do this, assign the hierarchy level MCH10## to the hierarchy level RS21000. Then assign the levels MCH1## and MCH2## to the hierarchy level MCH10##.

2.

2006/Q2

Then assign the merchandise categories to the corresponding merchandise category hierarchy levels as illustrated in the figure.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

105

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Solution 7: Merchandise Categories Task 1: Look at the merchandise category hierarchy of SMART Retailer Inc. 1.

Display the hierarchy under the merchandise category object RS21000 (General Merchandise Structure). How many levels are directly below the first level? _______________________________________________________ a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Environment → Merchandise Category Usage Merchandise category object:

RS21000

All merchandise category objects b)

Program → Execute There are 9 levels directly below the first level.

2.

How can you recognize the merchandise category in this display? _______________________________________________________ a)

3.

There are no longer any hierarchy levels under the merchandise category, there are now only assigned articles and sites.

Must all merchandise categories be assigned to the same hierarchy level? _______________________________________________________ a)

No, the merchandise categories can be assigned to any hierarchy level. However, only merchandise categories or hierarchy levels can be located under a hierarchy level.

Continued on next page

106

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Task 2: You want to use the following new structure for your sales goods. You create it and add it to the existing merchandise category hierarchy under the node (hierarchy level) RS21000:

Figure 50: New merchandise category hierarchy

1.

Create a merchandise category hierarchy level MCH10## with the description Furniture GR##. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Merchandise Category Hierarchy Level → Create Hierarchy Level

b)

Enter Description

c) 2.

MCH10##

Furniture Gr##

Save.

Then create the remaining merchandise category hierarchy levels Hierarchy Level

Description

MCH1##

House Gr##

MCH2##

Garden Gr##

a)

Proceed in the same way as described in the solution under point 1) MCH1##

House Gr##

MCH2##

Garden Gr## Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

107

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Task 3: Now create the individual merchandise categories. 1.

Create merchandise category MC1## with the description Kitchen Gr.##. Assign the MC (merchandise category) reference article MC14201 to the merchandise category and then save the merchandise category. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Merchandise Category → Create Merchandise category

b)

c) 2.

MC1##

Choose Merchandise category basic data Mdse Catgry Desc.

Kitchen Gr##

MC ref. article

MC14201

Merchandise Category → Save

Create merchandise category MC2## with the description Living Gr.##. Assign the MC reference article MC14201 to the merchandise category and then save your merchandise category.

Continued on next page

108

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

Create a value-only article with the key W_MC2## for this merchandise category. The description of the value-only article is Value-only article Living Gr##. Do not change any other data. Save the value-only article. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Merchandise Category → Create Merchandise category

b)

Choose Merchandise category basic data Mdse Catgry Desc.

Living Gr##

MC ref. article

MC14101

c)

merchandise Category → Save

d)

Create a value-only article: choose MC article

e) 3.

MC2##

Article

W_MC2## → Enter

Mdse Catgry Desc.

Value-only article Living Gr##

Material → Save

Create merchandise category MC3## with the description Garden furniture Gr.## and then save. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Merchandise Category → Create Merchandise category

b)

Choose Merchandise category basic data Mdse Catgry Desc.

c)

MC3##

Garden furniture Gr##

Merchandise Category → Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

109

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Task 4: Now create the mapped structure from the merchandise category hierarchy levels and merchandise categories, and assign these under level RS21000 in the existing merchandise category hierarchy of the sample company. 1.

To do this, assign the hierarchy level MCH10## to the hierarchy level RS21000. Then assign the levels MCH1## and MCH2## to the hierarchy level MCH10##. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Merchandise Category Hierarchy Level → Merchandise Category → Merchandise Category Hierarchy Assignments → Create Hierarchy level

RS21000 → [Enter]

Hierarchy Level

MCH10##

b)

Assignment → Save

c)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Hierarchy Assignment → Merchandise Category Hierarchy Assignments → Create

d)

Hierarchy level

MCH10## → [Enter]

Hierarchy Level

MCH1##, MCH2##

Assignment → Save

Continued on next page

110

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Merchandise Categories

2.

Then assign the merchandise categories to the corresponding merchandise category hierarchy levels as illustrated in the figure. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Merchandise Category → Change

b) Merchandise category

MC1##

Hierarchy level

MCH1##

Choose Create (beside MG hierarchy level) c) Merchandise category

MC2##

Hierarchy level

MCH1##

Choose Create (beside MG hierarchy level) d) Merchandise category

MC3##

Hierarchy level

MCH2##

Choose Create (beside MG hierarchy level)

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

111

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy • Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category value-only and merchandise category reference articles

112

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 109

Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in the site Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make the necessary settings for it

With the assignment of merchandise categories to sites, many business processes (for example, replenishment, POS) can be controlled in detail at merchandise category level. Otherwise, when you use local assortments, it is a prerequisite for listing with the merchandise category/assortment level listing procedure.

Business Example You defined new merchandise categories. Carry out test sales in various stores and assign the new merchandise categories to the corresponding stores.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

113

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Figure 51: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

The assignments and their effects: • • • • • • • • • • • •

114

Department: The department in which the contact person is working. Assortment length: Relation for the definition of standard allocation rules in the retailing system. Price list type: The logical summary of business objects for the price determination. Pricing strategy: This establishes a recommended price from the competitors’ prices. Class type: pricing; relates to the groups of competitors. Groups of competitors: pricing. Groups of competitors can be assigned here. Requirement groups: replenishment. Requirement groups for each merchandise category. Store procurement profile: replenishment. Controls the parameters for store procurement. Revaluation profile: This describes the sales price revaluation process. Inventory management on a value-only basis: This establishes whether stock is managed on an article or merchandise category basis. Exceptions in inventory management: in case, in spite of inventory management on a value-only basis, an article is managed on an article basis. Supplying sites: alternative to the general supplying site.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Basic Principles of Inventory Management on a Value-Only Basis

Figure 52: Inventory Management on a Value-Only Basis

In value-based inventory management, goods movement are not posted on an article basis. There is no quantity-based, but only a value-based update which is posted to a value-only article. To find the value-only article for posting, the system uses value only article determination. A value-only article can be created for each merchandise category. To fine-tune inventory management on a value-only basis in a merchandise category, several group articles can be created for this merchandise category. A merchandise category hierarchy value-only article can be created for a merchandise category hierarchy node. It therefore incorporates all articles of the merchandise categories under this node. If a store uses cross-merchandise-category inventory management, you must decide on a merchandise category hierarchy level on which the inventory management is to be carried out. Without this limitation, sales values that do not make business sense may appear - especially in statistics showing comparisons between sites. In the store, you use the "IM Profile" in the Valuation/Inventory Management view of the site master to determine the type of inventory management to be used for the store in question. Eight profiles are delivered in the standard system; these cannot be changed. Within a merchandise category on value-based inventory management, you can post some articles on an article basis, for example, when these are particularly valuable items.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

115

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

You can define your own profiles by copying one of the existing profiles (using the customer namespace). In the copy, you can set the Value-only mat. free indicator. This way, every value-only article can be used in any hierarchy level. Valuation at retail must have been activated in the store. In practice, it is often normal to post articles from the fruit and vegetable area or from the hardware store assortment to the value-only article. Unlike the inventory management on an article basis, the exact quantity-based stock is then no longer visible in the store. Only the total stock is still visible as a value. Example: the store does not carry the articles of the merchandise category Fruit on an article basis. Then, during the goods receipt, all values are posted to a dummy article, the merchandise category value-only article. The stock value on the merchandise category value-only article then corresponds to the total of all posted goods receipts. For example, you have a stock of 100 USD in store A, but in the system you cannot tell whether this 100 USD corresponds to 50kg of apples or 20kg of bananas and 20kg of apples. The various options in inventory management on a value-only basis are dealt with in more detail in course IRT320.

116

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

113

Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Exercise 8: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Make settings to carry the stock of a merchandise category on a value-only basis in a store • Assign a merchandise category to a site • Use mass maintenance to assign a merchandise category to several sites

Business Example Your new merchandise categories are to be carried in a test run in store R1## and then later in other stores too.

Task 1: You are dealing with the settings for the inventory management on a value-only basis in the store. 1.

Find out which settings you need to make for inventory management on a value-only basis in your store R1##.

2.

What does the IM Profile (F1) determine? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

3.

At which levels is inventory management permitted in your store? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

4.

Is Valuation at Retail activated? ______________________________________________________

5.

In future, the store R1## will sell articles from the merchandise categories RF11111 and RF11112. Assign the two new merchandise categories to the store.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

117

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Task 2: You also want to carry the articles in these merchandise categories in some other sites. To reduce the amount of work involved in this, you use the mass maintenance. 1.

118

Choose Retailing: Master Data → Site Data → Environment → Sites to Merchandise Category and allocate the merchandise categories of the merchandise category hierarchy level RF11100 to the sites R4## and R5##.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Solution 8: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories Task 1: You are dealing with the settings for the inventory management on a value-only basis in the store. 1.

Find out which settings you need to make for inventory management on a value-only basis in your store R1##. a)

Retail: Master Data → Site Data → Site → Change Site

2.

R1##

What does the IM Profile (F1) determine? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

Go to the Valuation/Inv. Mgmnt tab

b)

F1 Help for field contents IM Profile The IM Profile specifies whether or not the inventory management at value-only level is planned for a site, and at what level.

3.

At which levels is inventory management permitted in your store? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a) IM Profile

0002

Inventory can be managed on both a material and merchandise category basis. 4.

Is Valuation at Retail activated? ______________________________________________________ a)

Valuation at Retail is activated.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

119

Unit 4: Article Groupings

5.

IRT310

In future, the store R1## will sell articles from the merchandise categories RF11111 and RF11112. Assign the two new merchandise categories to the store. a)

b)

Scroll down the merchandise category overview and enter: Mer.cat.

RF11111

Mer.cat.

RF11112

Site → Save

Task 2: You also want to carry the articles in these merchandise categories in some other sites. To reduce the amount of work involved in this, you use the mass maintenance. 1.

Choose Retailing: Master Data → Site Data → Environment → Sites to Merchandise Category and allocate the merchandise categories of the merchandise category hierarchy level RF11100 to the sites R4## and R5##. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Site Data → Environment → Sites to Merchandise Category Merchandise category hierarchy

RF11100

Program → Execute

120

b)

Select the merchandise category hierarchy and choose Assignment → Create

c)

On the following screen, select the sites R4## and R5##.

d)

Choose Create assignment

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Correlation between Sites and Merchandise Categories

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in the site • Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make the necessary settings for it

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

121

Unit 4: Article Groupings

Lesson: 118

IRT310

Article Hierarchy Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •

Describe the objective of the article hierarchy Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a time-dependent basis

In the article hierarchy you group your articles in a consumer-oriented and hierarchical structure, with which you can effectively map how the consumer makes his/her purchase decisions and according to what requirements.

Business Example Since the standard merchandise category hierarchy you use is oriented towards the purchasing viewpoint, you want to set up an alternative hierarchy. This hierarchy will focus on the sales viewpoints.

Defining the Article Hierarchy The article hierarchy gives you the option of grouping articles according to customer-specific criteria. Thereby, often sales-relevant aspects are taken into account while the merchandise category hierarchy is oriented towards the material attributes of the article. The article hierarchy is taken into account in planning, in operative processes and in reporting. You also have the option of linking shops with the article hierarchy in order to display merchandise areas in the department store.

122

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Figure 53: Article Hierarchy: Example

If a tree does not exist yet, on the Node Assignments tab define the top node (root node) and specify a description for this node. A node must have a description. You can assign an unlimited number of nodes to the top node, select descriptions for the nodes and define the node characteristics on the Node Attributes tab. On the Article Assignments tab, you can assign articles to every node of the hierarchy. On the Language-Specific Texts tab, you can maintain language-dependent node descriptions for each node, and on the Free Text tab, texts can be defined for each node. In the standard, the article hierarchy maintenance offers the following access options in the detail view: Access with Node ID Only: If you want to navigate to the detail maintenance with a hierarchy node, you can use the node collective search help to select a node or enter a node ID and a key date directly (in the case of a scheduled hierarchy). Access with Article Only: If you want to navigate to the detail maintenance with an article of the hierarchy, you can use the article search help to select an article or enter an article number and a key date directly (in the case of a scheduled hierarchy). The detail maintenance is always accessed with the parent node of the articles’s directly assigned node. Access with Node ID and Article:

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

123

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

If the user wants to navigate to the detail maintenance with an article of the hierarchy, and wants to restrict the search for an article (because, for example, he/she always works with articles of a certain node), then this node can be selected as an additional selection criterion. By setting the Operative indicator, the Valid From date of the node assignment is set to the current date. By setting the Deletion Flag indicator, the Valid To date is set to the current date or, in the case of an OTB-relevant change, it is set to the end date of the complete delivery period. The logically deleted node assignment can be physically deleted on the end date (for example, by a scheduled deletion report). You can navigate from the hierarchy maintenance to, for example, the department store/shop maintenance, by choosing Event. You can only navigate to the department store/shop maintenance from a node that is flagged as a Category. Every article hierarchy is created with the status planned. Time-dependent node and article assignments can be defined in this status, but these changes do not affect the operational assignments. An article hierarchy can be activated and in this way used operatively as soon as the planning of the assortment structure is complete. Once the hierarchy is activated, only limited changes can be made to it. In an unscheduled article hierarchy, only article assignments can be changed. In a scheduled hierarchy, only the future structure and article assignments can be deleted manually. An article hierarchy, which should no longer be used operatively, can be deactivated. Deactivated article hierarchies cannot be changed or activated. The article hierarchy is included as a node search help in many operative SAP for Retail processes (including Price Planning Workbench, Purchase Order).

124

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Article Hierarchy Maintenance

Figure 54: Attributes of the Article Hierarchy

The following Attributes of the hierarchy can be defined for a new article hierarchy that is to be created: •

Distribution Chain (Sales Organization and Distribution Channel) If a BW update is set, you can only activate one distribution chain independent article hierarchy (i.e. one client-wide) or distribution chain specific article hierarchies with a different distribution chain each.

•

BW This indicator specifies whether the article hierarchy should be transferred to SAP BW. Specification is optional.

•

Multiple Material Assignment The “Multiple Material Assign.“ indicator controls the assignment of an article within an article hierarchy.

•

Scheduling By setting the “Structure Scheduling“ indicator, structural changes can be scheduled on a time-basis, in other words, the change becomes valid when the “Valid From“ date is reached.

•

2006/Q2

Language-Specific Hierarchy Descriptions

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

125

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

The article hierarchy automatically has the status planned. To use the hierarchy in operative processes and to extract the hierarchy into SAP BW, the hierarchy must be activated.

Figure 55: Article Hierarchy: Integration

Customizing Settings for the Article Hierarchy To make it easier to navigate in the article hierarchy, you can define a hierarchy level semantic (description of the hierarchy level) in Customizing. The levels are defined top down, in other words, the first level in the hierarchy structure corresponds to the top node level of the article hierarchy, the second level corresponds to the child node level of the top node, and so on. Furthermore, one level of the article hierarchy can be defined as the category level in the table.

126

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Figure 56: Customizing: Edit Hierarchy Levels

Defining hierarchy level semantics only makes sense in properly defined hierarchy structures. The node in the hierarchy does not transfer the semantics when nodes are moved between levels. Once the semantics have been defined, they can only be changed if no article hierarchy exists yet in the system.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

127

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

In the Customizing table, you can maintain an article hierarchy level as a category level. When a hierarchy node is created (in the hierarchy maintenance or from an external system by means of the BAPI interface), the system checks whether it is a node from this category level. Defining nodes or an article hierarchy level as a category means that: • • • •

• •

The category is the root node of the assigned Consumer Decision Tree (CDT). The category defines the uppermost assortment-forming node. In the Category Management, the category is the uppermost relevant node for the update into SAP BW. If multiple article assignment is used, the category is the node to resolve the multiple assignment. Within the category, the article is always assigned uniquely. If multiple article assignment is used, the category is the node to determine the department store-shop assignment. Defining a category level makes it easier to maintain the category if a certain level of the article hierarchy and therefore all nodes of this level are defined as categories. Alternatively, you can manually maintain hierarchy nodes by means of the hierarchy maintenance, but only if no level is selected as a category. A plausibility check ensures that only one level can be defined as a category level.

You can only change the category indicator if there is no article hierarchy in the system. In the dialog screen, you can create an Event pushbutton for every level of the article hierarchy; this will allow you to navigate to every other program or every other transaction without making any modifications. At this point, you can determine a description for the Event pushbutton. If an internal number range interval is globally defined for the article hierarchy, the internal number assignment in Customizing can be overridden by an external number assignment on a level-specific basis.

128

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

The following additional Customizing settings can also be checked: •

Change Documents When the change document flag is set, change documents are generated when articles and nodes are changed in active article hierarchies. The flag status is checked when the article hierarchy is activated.

•

Check End Nodes If the Check End Nodes indicator is selected, the system performs a check for value-only articles in an active article hierarchy which ensures that the articles are only attached to end nodes.

•

Delete Check If the Delete Check indicator is activated, node assignments can only be deleted if no nodes or articles are assigned to the node.

•

CDT Update You can use this parameter to control the update of the master data of the article hierarchy in SAP BW. If the parameter is activated, the master data is updated in SAP BW without scheduling information, provided also the indicator for the BW update is set for the hierarchy. If the parameter is not activated, the master data of the article hierarchy (up to ten levels) is updated in SAP BW including scheduling information (validity periods of scheduled article hierarchies).

•

Number Range Interval You can use this parameter to globally specify an internal or external number range interval for the article hierarchy on a customer-specific basis.

•

Sorting You can use this parameter to define the sorting within the tree display. By default, the article hierarchy is sorted by the technical node ID. However, you can also define sorting by the node description.

Individual tree columns can also be hidden in the article hierarchy dialog maintenance. In the case of an internal number assignment, by hiding the non-descriptive “Node ID“ column, for example, you can use the article hierarchy nodes description to navigate.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

129

Unit 4: Article Groupings

130

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

127

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Exercise 9: Article Hierarchy Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy

Business Example You want to introduce a new department in your stores and would therefore like to tentatively enhance the article hierarchy. You do this in an article hierarchy with the status ’planned’. Once the decision for introducing the new department is final, the changes will be activated.

Task 1:

1.

How many active article hierarchies can there be in the system? Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □ □

2.

A B C D E

exactly one distribution-chain-dependent article hierarchy several distribution-chain-dependent article hierarchies exactly one distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy several distribution-chain-independent article hierarchies exactly one distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy and several distribution-chain-dependent article hierarchies.

The article hierarchy replaces the merchandise category hierarchy. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

□ □ 3.

True False

The article hierarchy has the following attributes: Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □

A B C D

It can be scheduled. It is dependent on the purchasing organization. Multiple assignments can be activated. It cannot be extracted into SAP BW.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

131

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Task 2: 1.

Create a new distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy ## with the description AH## as a copy of the active hierarchy “R3“. Copy the hierarchy with article assignments. The assignments should be scheduled and multiple assignment of articles should be enabled.

2.

Now change the copied article hierarchy and add a new department and two new themes in this department. For one theme, you create two new areas that correspond to your brands. Assign the following IDs and descriptions: Department: R30## – Beauty ## Theme: R30##1 – Cosmetics ## R30##2 – Perfume ## Area (for the theme Cosmetics): R30##11 – Loveal ## R30##12 – Richy ## The validity starts with the current date and runs indefinitely.

132

3.

Assign the articles R1TA08## and R1TA09## to the lowest node R30##11 – Loveal.

4.

Now compare the new planned hierarchy with the active hierarchy, and see where the differences are. To do this, simulate the copy of the new node you have created (R30##) under the highest node of the active article hierarchy. Also compare the assigned articles.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

Solution 9: Article Hierarchy Task 1: 1.

How many active article hierarchies can there be in the system? Answer: B, C In the system there can be several distribution-chain-dependent article hierarchies and exactly one distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy.

2.

The article hierarchy replaces the merchandise category hierarchy. Answer: False

3.

The article hierarchy has the following attributes: Answer: A, C The article hierarchy can be scheduled and multiple assignments can be activated.

Task 2: 1.

Create a new distribution-chain-independent article hierarchy ## with the description AH## as a copy of the active hierarchy “R3“. Copy the hierarchy with article assignments. The assignments should be scheduled and multiple assignment of articles should be enabled. a)

Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Hierarchy Data → Create

b)

Transaction WMATGRP01

c)

Enter the hierarchy ID ## and leave the fields for the sales organization and the distribution channel empty. In the With Template subscreen, specify the ID of the active article hierarchy R3. Set the With Material Assignments indicator and the Multiple Material Assignment and Structure Scheduling indicators. The indicator for BW extraction is already set.

d)

In the Language Maintenance subscreen, assign the text AH## in the language EN. Choose Execute. Two messages appear, which inform you that the BW connection is not supported and the article hierarchy cannot be used in operative processes. (This is only possible for active article hierarchies.) Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

133

Unit 4: Article Groupings

2.

IRT310

Now change the copied article hierarchy and add a new department and two new themes in this department. For one theme, you create two new areas that correspond to your brands. Assign the following IDs and descriptions: Department: R30## – Beauty ## Theme: R30##1 – Cosmetics ## R30##2 – Perfume ## Area (for the theme Cosmetics): R30##11 – Loveal ## R30##12 – Richy ## The validity starts with the current date and runs indefinitely.

3.

a)

Menu path: Logistics -> Retailing -> Master Data -> Article Hierarchy Data -> Change

b)

Transaction WMATGRP02

c)

Enter the hierarchy ID ## and choose Execute. The highest node R3 – Enterprise is automatically selected. On the right-hand side, the nodes under the Node Assignments tab are maintained via the Create Node Assignment.

d)

Enter the current date as the Valid From date and accept 31.12.9999 as the Valid To date. Choose Enter.

e)

Then, on the left-hand side of the screen, select the node that has just been created, and create the two themes in the same way. Then, on the left-hand side of the screen, select the theme R30##1 and create the two areas.

Assign the articles R1TA08## and R1TA09## to the lowest node R30##11 – Loveal. a)

Choose Logistics -> Retailing -> Master Data -> Article Hierarchy Data -> Change

b)

Transaction WMATGRP02

c)

In the article hierarchy tree, select the node R30##11 and maintain the article assignment in the right-hand screen area under the Article Assignments tab. Choose Create Multiple Assignments to do this. Continued on next page

134

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Hierarchy

4.

2006/Q2

Now compare the new planned hierarchy with the active hierarchy, and see where the differences are. To do this, simulate the copy of the new node you have created (R30##) under the highest node of the active article hierarchy. Also compare the assigned articles. a)

Menu path: Logistics -> Retailing -> Master Data -> Article Hierarchy Data -> Simulate

b)

Transaction WMATGRP08

c)

In this transaction, enter the source hierarchy AH-ID ## and the department node you have just created (R30##). The target hierarchy is the active hierarchy R3 and the target node is the highest node of this hierarchy, which is also called R3. In the case of a copy, the new node R30## was assigned as a child node under the node R3.

d)

Set the With Material Assignments indicator and choose Enter.

e)

In the Checks subscreen, set all flags for the target hierarchy. Choose Execute. The system then displays which nodes and which articles are missing in the active hierarchy.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

135

Unit 4: Article Groupings

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the objective of the article hierarchy • Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy • Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy • Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a time-dependent basis

136

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the basic terms of the classification • Describe the class types used in SAP Retail • Describe the structure and purpose of the merchandise category hierarchy • Create merchandise categories with the associated merchandise category value-only and merchandise category reference articles • Name the controls that are are linked with the merchandise category in the site • Explain the inventory management on a value-only basis and make the necessary settings for it • Describe the objective of the article hierarchy • Explain the difference to the merchandise category hierarchy • Describe the structure and the attributes of the article hierarchy • Create an article hierarchy and assign articles to this hierarchy on a time-dependent basis

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

137

Unit Summary

138

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 5 Assortment Management

135

Unit Overview This unit explains the term assortment and the concept of assortment management. It also explains how to set up listing procedures and their parameters, as well as possible combinations.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • •

Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail Name the different ways of managing assortments Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management Name the different listing procedures and describe their options Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles Create an assortment list for the listed articles Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the system Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

Unit Contents Lesson: Assortment ............................................................141 Exercise 10: Reference Site ..............................................159 Exercise 11: General Assortments .......................................163 Lesson: Listing Procedures....................................................169 Exercise 12: Listing Procedures..........................................177 Lesson: Assortment List .......................................................182

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

139

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Exercise 13: Assortment List .............................................187

140

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 136

Lesson: Assortment

Assortment Lesson Duration: 40 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail Name the different ways of managing assortments Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management

The topics Assortments and Listing are extremely important in SAP Retail. Point this out to participants and provide a detailed explanation.

Business Example Based on criteria that you established previously, you have to decide which articles your new store can order.

Definition: Assortment The assortment is part of the cross-company merchandise offering that is assigned to a specified target group for a particular validity period. An assortment determines if a store, a distribution center or a customer can receive certain articles at a certain time. The assortment can therefore be used to check purchase orders and sales orders. By assigning articles to assortments, you determine which assortments and, therefore, which articles a store can buy and sell. A site cannot buy or sell articles that are not included in one of its assortments. In assortment management, you determine for each site and each article respectively which site may procure an article in which time period. This is also called listing.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

141

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Figure 57: Local and General Assortment

The assortment is an SAP Retail object, to which articles are assigned, that is listed, for a particular period of time. There are two types of assortments: •

Local Assortments These are termed type A for stores and type B for distribution centers. When you create a site (in other words, a store or distribution center), the system automatically creates a local assortment and then assigns it to the site. This local assortment is site-specific and cannot be assigned to another site. Each site has one local assortment.

•

General Assortments General assortments are type C assortments. They can be assigned to any number of customers, and every customer can be assigned several general assortments. If you have set the indicator for multiple assignments in Customizing, you can also use assortments of this type to assign stores and distribution centers.

Assortment Management The assortment management demands of retailers differ greatly. Some require identical assortments in all areas, while others demand assortments unique (for example) to each store. Assortment Management takes account of these differences and offer a variety of tools to allow any combination of article assortments as well as the structuring of article assortments for wholesale.

142

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

The main tasks of assortment management for retail sites or customers are: • • • • •

Determining articles that can be sold at a point of sale in a store Adding these articles to the article assortment that is assigned to this store’s distribution center. Determining the distribution centers from which articles are to be distributed, when stores are to be supplied from the warehouse Determining the stores in which the article can be sold at the point of sale Determining the articles that should be included in the customer assortment

Figure 58: Assortment Management

An assortment is an object that is assigned articles for a particular validity period. This assignment results in listing conditions, which serve as the basis for various evaluations. Once an assortment user is assigned to an assortment, articles for the assortment user in question can be used in various business functions. The most important assortment user in Retail is the retail site. The assortments of a site include all the articles that are relevant in its business activities.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

143

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Figure 59: Multiple Assignments of Assortments

In Customizing, you can determine whether the multiple assignment (n:m) of assortments to sites should be possible, or whether assortments should be limited to a 1:1 combination of the site and the assortment. If you activate multiple assignment in Customizing, a site can have different assortments and an assortment can be assigned to different sites.

144

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

If a site is created, the system automatically generates a site-specific local assortment. • •

In the case of 1:1 assignment, every site has exactly one local assortment. No other assortment can be assigned to this site. In the case of n:m assignment, every site still has a local assortment, but there is no limit to the number of general assortments that can be assigned to this site. Hint: Converting an existing 1:1 assignment to multiple assignment In earlier releases of the ERP system, only a 1:1 assignment of assortments to sites was possible. Accordingly, every store could only have one assortment, and a certain assortment could only ever be assigned to one store. In the current release, you can choose between the old 1:1 assignment and the new n:m assignment. This less restrictive assignment means that you have the option of assigning previously created assortments to an existing store (for example, when new stores are opened) , and you can more precisely adjust the goods on offer in a store by assigning one or more general assortments to the store. You should only decide on single assignment (1:1) or multiple assignments (n:m) after careful consideration. This is particularly important because changing the assignment method affects all aspects of the listing process. You can find a detailed description of how to convert the 1:1 assignment to multiple assignments at http://help.sap.com under the menu option Upgrading to Multiple Assignment of Assortments to Site in the SAP online documentation for SAP Retail.

Figure 60: Assortment Management with the General Assortment

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

145

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

In many retail companies, the assortments, for example, for a distribution chain or for a particular region, are generally identical or are only slightly different. For this reason, you should only define a few general assortments and then assign them to a group of assortment users. Depending on how the indicator for the multiple assignment of assortments to sites is set in Customizing, you have the following options: • •

If the indicator is set, stores, distribution centers or customers can be used as assortment users. If the indicator is not set, only customers can be used as assortment users.

You can significantly reduce the number of listing condition records on the database by using multiple assignments, as a general assortment can sometimes be assigned to a large number of sites. This is due to the fact that articles are listed for assortments and not for sites, and therefore, the listing conditions created are valid for all the sites that are assigned to the assortment. Unlike local assortments - which you cannot change using the assortment maintenance and which you therefore cannot assign to other customers or sites - in general assortments (assortment category C) you can assign an unlimited number of sites or customers, provided that the multiple assignment (n:m assignment) of sites to assortments is activated in Customizing. Exclusion modules can be used to define exceptions for assortments. This means that individual articles are explicitly excluded from being listed in an assortment.

Figure 61: Assortment Management with the Reference Site

In addition to the individual assignment of a general assortment to an assortment user, you also have the option of defining reference sites and assigning them to sites in a 1:m assignment.

146

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

The main advantage of the reference site is the one-time assignment of general assortments. All dependent sites (sites that are assigned to the reference site) automatically adopt all the assortments from the reference site. Via this pointer function, changes made to general assortments and changes relating to assignments of general assortments to the reference site, are automatically conveyed. . Assortments can only be assigned by means of reference sites if multiple assignment (n:m) is set in Customizing. If you delete the assignement of a site to a reference site, all the assignments of the reference site’s assortments to the site are also deleted.

Figure 62: An Overview of the Assortment Management Options

A site cannot be assigned to an assortment twice (directly and via the reference site). However, the site can be assigned to an assortment directly and to another assortment via the reference site.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

147

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Assortment Management Options

Figure 63: Assortment Management with the Reference Site (Example)

In our example, we assume that the three stores in the north have the same assortment. In this case, the assortment is created for a reference site and this reference site is then assigned to the stores. If a change is made in the assortment, only the assortment of the reference site must be changed and not the assortment of the individual sites. The same principle applies for the sites in the south. The broken line of the general assortment north for the reference site of the store group south is to be looked at theoretically here, to display the option of an n:m assignment. Every reference site can have several assortments (n:m). Every store can be assigned to only one reference site for the assortment management (1:m).

148

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

Figure 64: Assortment Management with the General Assortment (Example)

In assortment management with the general assortment you can map areas (for example, beverages, confectionary) that reflect (among other things) the departments in the stores. For each of these areas, you create one or more general assortments with different article assignments. Then you assign the general assortments to the stores.

Assortment Maintenance In the assortment maintenance, you can assign assortment users to general assortments.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

149

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Figure 65: Maintaining Assortments

There is a user-friendly assortment assignment tool available for assigning assortment users to general assortments. This tool allows you to sort the displayed sites, for example, according by region (as above), or to select for sites that are not yet assigned for new sites that have been created. The system displays two tree structures: a list of the general assortments and their already assigned sites on the left, and a list of sites for which assignments are still possible on the right. You drag and drop to assign the selected sites to the desired assortment. You can also create or change new general assortments in that assortment assignment tool. In the assortment maintenance, you assign merchandise categories (and assortment grades, if applicable), a layout, or an article hierarchy (with the corresponding hierarchy node) to the assortment. However, it is only possible to assign customers in the ’Create/Change Assortments’ transaction, while sites can be assigned in the transaction for creating or changing the assortment and in the tool for assigning assortments.

Assortment Modules An assortment can consist of one or more assortment modules. An assortment module is a group of articles. Examples are Household Cleaner or Ladies’ Blouses. Assortment modules can be created manually, or automatically from the applications (article maintenance, promotion, etc.). To minimize the time and maintenance effort, modules should be created automatically rather than manually.

150

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

Figure 66: Maintaining Assortment Modules

A profile module is created automatically during the article maintenance for each assortment and merchandise category. You generate shelf modules during the maintenance of layout modules that are assigned to the assortments. A promotion module contains the articles that are to be dealt with together in a promotion or a theme. A standard module contains any articles from any merchandise categories. It contains the regular long-term rule assortment and is created manually. The local module is only valid for one site and is therefore the “local assortment”. You can use an exclusion module to exclude articles from the existing assortment for a certain period of time. Rack jobber modules are modules for which vendors deliver and present articles in stores themselves. A rack jobber module can only be assigned to exactly one vendor. An article that is listed in a rack jobber module cannot be listed in any other module. In Sales and Distribution, you use assortment modules to maintain a number of articles for value contracts. Like standard modules, you can also use these modules for assortment functions. You use a different transaction for creating them in Sales and Distribution (WSV2).

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

151

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Create Assortments for New Sites If you open new sites and want to create assortments for them in a very short time, you can select one of the following options: • • •

Setup based on Merchandise Category Assortment Copy Assign the new site to the general assortments (directly or via a reference site)

However, you must check whether or not the multiple assignment is active. The assortment copy is only possible if the indicator is not set, while the site can only be assigned to general assortments when multiple assignments is active. 1. Setup based on Merchandise Category You can organize the assortment of the new site by adding articles from available merchandise categories that are already assigned to the assortment, and executing transaction WSM8 (Reorganize Listing Conditions By Merchandise Category).

Figure 67: Setup based on Merchandise Category

You can define one or more merchandise categories and add them to the target assortment. The system checks the existing listing conditions for every combination of articles and assortments. If an article is not in the target assortment, the article is listed there. 2. Assortment Copy

152

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

If the indicator for the multiple assignment of assortments to sites is not set in Customizing, you can simply copy the contents (the assigned articles) of a whole assortment to the local assortment of the new site. If the new assortment is to contain the same articles as an assortment that already exists, you only need to copy the listing conditions from the source assortment.

Figure 68: Assortment Copy

The source assortment can consist of one or more assortment modules. When you copy an assortment into an other assortment, you also copy these assignments. If the source assortment consists of modules A,B and C, the target assortment has the same modules. You can execute the copy program for assortments in dialog mode (transaction WSK1) or in the background (transaction WSK3). In both cases, the system checks in advance that there are no problems that would prevent listing. 3. Assignment of General Assortments/Reference Site If the indicator for the multiple assignments of assortments to sites is set in Customizing, you can assign existing general assortments to the site. This means that all articles contained in these assortments are also valid for the new site.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

153

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Figure 69: Assignment of General Assortments/Reference Site

In addition to the individual assignment of a general assortment to an assortment user, you also have the option of assigning a reference site to the new site. This means that the new site has the same assignments to assortments as the reference site. If assortments are already assigned to a site, it can only be assigned to a reference site if the reference site does not have the same assortment assignments. The reference site is assigned in transaction REFSITE.

Further Maintenance for the Operative Use of New Sites To operatively use a new store that has just been created, not only must assortments be assigned to this store, but purchasing and logistics data also have to be maintained for this store. To proceed with this as efficiently as possible, you can arrange similar stores into groups and maintain data for a whole group at once, instead of for every individual store. Store groupings can be formed on the basis of different criteria, for example according to geographical location, size and demographic aspects. Some retail companies use the same store groupings for all functional areas, while other retail companies use different store groupings for different functional areas. Large and rapidly expanding retail companies may open a new store every second day or even more often. It is critical that such store openings run smoothly, as this has a significant influence on the mark that a retail chain leaves in a new market. Therefore, simple and efficient data maintenance is very important in this process, both when setting up the master data of the new store and when processing the first purchase orders.

154

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

You can use store groupings for the maintenance of purchasing data (vendor/site data, purchasing info records and purchase conditions), assortment data and logistics&replenishment data. After you use reference stores to create the master data for a new store, and a multiplier for the consumption data, you can carry out the forecast for the new stores and then start a replenishment run to automatically generate the first store orders. Reference stores for purchasing and logistics data are also defined and assigned in transaction REFSITE.

Figure 70: Process of a Store Opening

Reference Site for Purchasing Data You can maintain vendor and site data, purchasing info records and purchasing conditions for a group of sites. Use the reference sites for the purchasing to do this. Such a reference site represents all sites that are assigned to it. The data is only stored at reference site level and is always used if there is no specific corresponding data at store level. As an extension of the supply source determination, the vendor and site data can also be used to limit vendors to only the assigned sites. If a vendor is assigned to a reference site, this vendor supplies all sites that are assigned to the reference site. Reference Site for Logistics and Replenishment Data You can maintain logistics and replenishment data for all stores (general reference store) or for all stores of a certain distribution chain (reference store at distribution chain level). You can now also use transaction REFSITE to create a store grouping according to customer-specific criteria. Since the replenishment and logistics data usually do not differ in different distribution chains, but rather between groups of sites (that are defined by common attributes such as size, geographical location,

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

155

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

and so on), it may be a good idea to maintain this data on the reference site. There is a separate mass maintenance tool that can be used to maintain logistics and replenishment data at this level. The section Create Assortments for New Sites already dealt with the various ways you can create assortments for new stores.

Subsequent Listing of Articles Under certain circumstances, in the case of goods receipt or a stock transfer, articles may be delivered to a site in which they are not listed. A promotion article may be listed in a distribution center, which then delivers the article to stores for which this article is not listed. Or a vendor sends a new article instead of an old article that is no longer carried. The site may accept the new article, even if it is not currently contained in the assortment of the site. For each site you can specify whether the goods receipt is allowed for deliveries of this kind. If the goods receipt is allowed, the system automatically creates the corresponding article master data and listing conditions ("Subsequent Listing"), so that the goods receipt can be posted for this delivery. If subsequent listing is not allowed, the delivery cannot be accepted and must be returned to the sender. To make subsequent listing possible, you must define under what circumstances subsequent listing should be carried out, by making the relevant settings in the site master data. You have the following selection options: • • •

156

Always Never On the basis of the decision of the user during the goods receipt

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

Figure 71: Listing during Goods Receipt

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

157

Unit 5: Assortment Management

158

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

IRT310

2006/Q2

IRT310

153

Lesson: Assortment

Exercise 10: Reference Site Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Evaluate information about assortments • Assign a reference site to the stores

Business Example You have a lot of stores in your company that plan their assortments in a very similar way. You therefore use reference sites, the assortment of which is assigned to other stores.

Task 1: In future, the site RS## should be used as a reference site for the assortments of store R5##. 1.

Define RS## as a reference site for assortments and then assign site R5## to this reference site. Then choose Create Job Without Param. Control, Immediate and Save.

2.

Can you also assign a customer master to a reference site? _________________________________________________________

Task 2: The system contains a general assortment with the key R1KIDSS##. Obtain an overview of the organization and structure of the assortment. 1.

2.

Display the assortment R1KIDSS##. You want to add the new merchandise categories RF11311 and RF11312 to this assortment. Assign the merchandise categories RF11311 and RF11312 with the assortment grade 1 to the assortment R1KIDSS##. Which assortment users are already assigned? _________________________________________________________

2006/Q2

3.

Assign your reference site RS## to your assortment as a further assortment user.

4.

Find out from which articles the assortment R1KIDSS##T is composed.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

159

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Solution 10: Reference Site Task 1: In future, the site RS## should be used as a reference site for the assortments of store R5##. 1.

Define RS## as a reference site for assortments and then assign site R5## to this reference site. Then choose Create Job Without Param. Control, Immediate and Save. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Mass Maintenance → Reference Sites Management

b)

Select Reference Site → Create. Group Type

01 Assortment

Reference Site

RS##

c)

Select reference site RS##

d)

Choose Add a Site Site

e) 2.

R5##

Save: Choose Create Job Without Param. Control, Immediate and then Save.

Can you also assign a customer master to a reference site? _________________________________________________________ a)

Customer master records can only be assigned to general assortments, not to a reference site.

Continued on next page

160

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

Task 2: The system contains a general assortment with the key R1KIDSS##. Obtain an overview of the organization and structure of the assortment. 1.

Display the assortment R1KIDSS##. You want to add the new merchandise categories RF11311 and RF11312 to this assortment. Assign the merchandise categories RF11311 and RF11312 with the assortment grade 1 to the assortment R1KIDSS##. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment → General Assortment → Change Merchandise category

RF11312

Assortment grade

1

Merchandise category

RF11311

Assortment grade

1

Choose Save 2.

Which assortment users are already assigned? _________________________________________________________ a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment → General Assortment → Display Assortment

b) 3.

Go to the Assortment User tab and enter RS## as the site.

Find out from which articles the assortment R1KIDSS##T is composed. a)

2006/Q2

Go to the Assortment User tab

Assign your reference site RS## to your assortment as a further assortment user. a)

4.

R1KIDSS##

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Evaluations → For Assortments → Article per Assortment

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

161

Unit 5: Assortment Management

162

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

IRT310

2006/Q2

IRT310

157

Lesson: Assortment

Exercise 11: General Assortments Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create general assortments • Assign merchandise categories and sites to a general assortment

Business Example In a workshop, you and your colleagues have developed a concept for future assortment planning. You have defined different article areas and want to define two general assortments for these article areas: large (L) and small (S). For each store, you decide, depending on the size of the department, which general assortment is assigned to the individual areas of the store.

Task 1: You start by implementing your concept in the Food area. 1.

Create two new assortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S by using the assortments FOOD-L and FOOD-S as the copy template. Also copy the assortment users, which are already assigned to the templates, to your new assortments. For your general assortments, assign the descriptions Groceries, Large Assortment and Groceries, Small Assortment.

2.

Which assortment category do the two new assortments have? _________________________________________________________

3.

You add merchandise category RS12310 (Chicken) to your new assortment FOOD-##-L.

Task 2: Once you have defined the assortments with the relevant merchandise categories, assign articles to the assortment. Use the mass maintenance function Setup Based on Merchandise Category to do this. 1.

List all articles in merchandise categories RS12110 to RS12320 in the assortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S with listing procedure B1. Note that articles are also listed in the supplying sites of the stores. However, local assortments should not be selected for listing. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

163

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Task 3: 1.

Store R4## will have a large food department. You assign the appropriate assortment. Select the relevant assortment and assign your store R4## to the assortment in the Assortment User tab.

2.

Which other assortment users are assigned to your assortment FOOD-##-L? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

Task 4: 1.

Check which listing conditions were created for your store R4##. To do this, check the tree display of listing conditions in evaluations for the article. Display all the listing conditions for merchandise category RS12310 for the assortment FOOD-##-L .

2.

Expand the nodes for the other sites of the tree structure in the example of an article and compare the listing modules. What do you notice? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

164

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

Solution 11: General Assortments Task 1: You start by implementing your concept in the Food area. 1.

Create two new assortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S by using the assortments FOOD-L and FOOD-S as the copy template. Also copy the assortment users, which are already assigned to the templates, to your new assortments. For your general assortments, assign the descriptions Groceries, Large Assortment and Groceries, Small Assortment. a)

2.

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment → General Assortment → Create Assortment

FOOD-##-L

Template

FOOD-L

Assortment Name

Food, large assortment ##

Assortment

FOOD-##-S

Template

FOOD-S

Assortment Name

Food, small assortment ##

Which assortment category do the two new assortments have? _________________________________________________________ a)

3.

C - General Assortment

You add merchandise category RS12310 (Chicken) to your new assortment FOOD-##-L. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment → General Assortment → Change Assortment

b)

FOOD-##-L

Go to the Mdse Cat. tab Merchandise Category

RS12310

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

165

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Task 2: Once you have defined the assortments with the relevant merchandise categories, assign articles to the assortment. Use the mass maintenance function Setup Based on Merchandise Category to do this. 1.

List all articles in merchandise categories RS12110 to RS12320 in the assortments FOOD-##-L and FOOD-##-S with listing procedure B1. Note that articles are also listed in the supplying sites of the stores. However, local assortments should not be selected for listing. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment → Mass Maintenance → Assortment → Setup Based on Merchandise Category Assortment

FOOD-##-L

Merchandise Category

RS12110 to RS12320

Listing Procedures

B1

b)

Select Also List Supplying Site

c)

Do not select List Local Assortments Also

Task 3: 1.

Store R4## will have a large food department. You assign the appropriate assortment. Select the relevant assortment and assign your store R4## to the assortment in the Assortment User tab. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment → General Assortment → Change Assortment

b)

Go to the Assortment User tab Assortment User

c) 2.

FOOD-##-L

R4##

Save and then choose Create Job Without Param.Control, Immediate and then Save.

Which other assortment users are assigned to your assortment FOOD-##-L? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ Continued on next page

166

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment

_________________________________________________________ a)

The stores 1241, 1251 and 1271 are already assigned to the assortment.

Task 4: 1.

Check which listing conditions were created for your store R4##. To do this, check the tree display of listing conditions in evaluations for the article. Display all the listing conditions for merchandise category RS12310 for the assortment FOOD-##-L . a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Evaluations → For Material → Tree Display of Listing Conditions

b)

c) 2.

Merchandise Category

RS12310

Assortment

FOOD-##-L

Choose Execute

Expand the nodes for the other sites of the tree structure in the example of an article and compare the listing modules. What do you notice? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ a)

Expand the menu nodes of the stores and the general assortment FOOD-##-L or FOOD-##-S is listed. As the modules are created for each general assortment, the same module exists for all articles for every store.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

167

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail • Name the different ways of managing assortments • Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management

168

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 163

Lesson: Listing Procedures

Listing Procedures Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview Create a listing procedure together with its parameters and other possible combinations

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Name the different listing procedures and describe their options Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles

This lesson tells you which Customizing settings you have to make to create an assortment.

Business Example Based on criteria that you established previously, you have to decide which stores can order which articles.

Basic Listing Procedures

Figure 72: Basic Procedure: Profile Check with Merchandise Category

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

169

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

The basic procedure ’profile check’ examines whether the article’s merchandise category has been assigned to the assortment. Only then the article will be listed for this assortment.

Figure 73: Basic Procedure: Profile Check with Assortment Grades

The basic procedure profile check with assortment grades checks • • •

Whether the merchandise category, to which the article belongs, has been assigned to the assortment Whether the article assortment grade is contained in the result grade of the merchandise category in the assortment Whether the listing algorithm, which contains the assortment grade, has been entered in the listing procedure

Only then will the article be listed for this assortment.

170

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Listing Procedures

Figure 74: Assortment Grade Rules (Example)

A listing algorithm describes how the assortment grades are combined in the assortment grade rule. Assortment grade rules describe the relationship between the various assortment grades. A quantity of assortment grade rule entries that belong together are grouped together in a "Listing Algorithm". Several listing algorithms can be used for defining the assortment grade rules. The listing algorithm that is to be used must then be entered in the listing procedure. You must maintain assortment grades and listing algorithms to be able to use the assortment grade rules. Currently, a maximum of 20 assortment grades can be contained in an assignment rule.

Figure 75: Basic Procedure: Layout Check

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

171

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

The basic procedure layout check checks: • • •

Whether the article is assigned to a layout module Whether the site is linked to a layout Whether the article layout module is a layout area in the assortment’s layout

Only under these conditions the article will be listed for the assortment in question.

Figure 76: Layout Check with Space Management

If space management is used for listing, then you are guaranteed that there will be space on the shelf for the new article and that the article will be listed in the stores where that shelf can be found (in other words, in the stores to which the relevant layout module is assigned) and in the distribution centers that deliver to these stores. A layout module can contain several layout module versions. Layout module versions have a time reference and contain articles in a shelf. Layout module versions can contain articles from different merchandise categories. An article can be assigned to several layout module versions and can also be positioned in different places on a shelf in the same layout module version. The versions allow you to plan in advance. In a layout module, the validity periods for individual versions are unique and cannot overlap. Due to the time-based scheduling for layout modules, you can map seasonal changes in a shelf. The listing period corresponds to the validity period of the layout module versions to which the articles are assigned.

172

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Listing Procedures

There are layout module variants at layout module version level. Layout module variants refer to just one layout module version and are used to map regional or even store-specific variances in layout modules. The layout module variants have the same validity period as their versions.

Figure 77: Basic Procedure: Classification Check

This procedure checks whether the classifying parameters of the article (characteristics and values) correspond to those of the assortment. Only then will the article be listed for this assortment.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

173

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Customizing Settings for the Listing Procedure

Figure 78: Listing Procedure - Control

Assortment listing procedure: If this indicator is set, the listing procedure defined in the assortment must be used. Otherwise, the procedure entered in the dialog is used. External procedure: Once an entry is provided, this procedure can be used directly in dialog mode (in assortment maintenance transactions). Multiple listing: If an article has already been listed by an assortment module, it can only be listed by other modules too if you set this indicator. This is the standard case (for example, in promotion listing and standard listing). Sequence control: You can use this control to set up various combinations of basic procedures. Rules: The type of check is determined by the rules and links of the basic procedures. Each basic procedure must be linked with a function module. The rules are implemented with user exits and you can replace them with your own rules.

174

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Listing Procedures

Figure 79: What happens in listing?

Listing updates listing conditions in table WLK1. Among other things, listing conditions contain the validity periods and the module numbers. Data is also added to MVKE, the table in which the sales data for the article is stored (for example, the distribution chain and the sales unit of measure). Furthermore, data is stored in table MARC. It contains site-specific article data, such as RP type, planning cycle, planning calendar, and so on. Data records for the respective supplying sites are also written into table MARC alongside the listed sites of a distribution chain. Data records are also created by the listing in tables MARD, WLK2, MBEW and MAW1, among others. The contents of the tables can be checked in transaction se16.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

175

Unit 5: Assortment Management

176

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

IRT310

2006/Q2

IRT310

171

Lesson: Listing Procedures

Exercise 12: Listing Procedures Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Define a listing procedure • List articles in your assortment

Business Example You have to decide which checks should be carried out in future to determine which articles are to be listed in the stores. For that purpose you have to know the settings for the listing procedures.

Task: You are now going to look at the listing procedure in more detail. 1.

To date, listing of articles in your assortments was done via the merchandise category check. In Customizing, check the settings for the relevant existing basic listing procedure.

2.

Check the basic procedure, which lists an article in a site if its merchandise category and possibly also or its assortment grade are managed there. Which indicator do you use to control whether or not the assortment grade should be checked during the listing? _________________________________________________________

3.

How would you ensure that, in addition to the merchandise category, the layout in the article and the site were to be checked too? Hint: Do not save the settings. _________________________________________________________

4.

What does a listing algorithm describe? _________________________________________________________

5.

Look at the listing algorithm in more detail. Which assortment levels does the assortment grade rule Extended assortment contain for the listing algorithm 01 and in what way are these two connected? _________________________________________________________ Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

177

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

_________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________

178

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Listing Procedures

Solution 12: Listing Procedures Task: You are now going to look at the listing procedure in more detail. 1.

To date, listing of articles in your assortments was done via the merchandise category check. In Customizing, check the settings for the relevant existing basic listing procedure. a)

2.

IMG: Logistics - General → Assortment → Assortment → Listing Procedures

Check the basic procedure, which lists an article in a site if its merchandise category and possibly also or its assortment grade are managed there. Which indicator do you use to control whether or not the assortment grade should be checked during the listing? _________________________________________________________ a)

3.

Listing procedure

B1

Basic procedure

mat. grp./ assortment grade

Indicator

No astmt grade

How would you ensure that, in addition to the merchandise category, the layout in the article and the site were to be checked too? Hint: Do not save the settings. _________________________________________________________ a)

4.

In the process control, set link rule &, and set L layout comparison procedure and Exit lstg lay. (Do NOT save!)

What does a listing algorithm describe? _________________________________________________________ a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Assortment → Assortment → Listing Algorithm A listing algorithm describes the combination of assortment grades. This also defines which assortment grades are added in a result assortment grade. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

179

Unit 5: Assortment Management

5.

IRT310

Look at the listing algorithm in more detail. Which assortment levels does the assortment grade rule Extended assortment contain for the listing algorithm 01 and in what way are these two connected? _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________ a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Assortment → Assortment → Assortment Grade Rules → select assortment grade 01/3 , and choose Details. Result assortment grade 3 contains assortment grades 1,2 and 3.

180

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Listing Procedures

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the different listing procedures and describe their options • Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

181

Unit 5: Assortment Management

Lesson: 175

IRT310

Assortment List Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview The following lesson defines the attributes of the assortment list and explains how to use them.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Create an assortment list for the listed articles Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the system Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

Make sure to refer to performance when creating an assortment list.

Business Example Your stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any new articles that are being added to your assortment.

182

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment List

Attributes of the Assortment List

Figure 80: Assortment List: Definition

The assortment list provides an overview of the listed assortment. The assortment list keeps the store or customer (assortment user) informed of any changes in the assortment (new or discontinued articles, price changes, promotion articles, and so on). Assortment lists can be configured according to the situation and assortment, and they can be prepared in different media (in print format, or as an electronic message sent for a store retailing system). Assortment List Versions: •

Full Version This version contains all currently valid articles and article data (from the date on which the assortment list was created).

•

Change Version This version contains only those articles that have been changed since the last message was created.

•

Mixed Version This version contains the last full version with all the subsequent changes and therefore shows the current status. This means that a current version can be printed out at any time.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

183

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Normally, the initial version is a full version of the assortment list. For performance reasons, all later versions are mixed versions as a rule.

The version management provides an overview of the versions that have been created, together with their validity periods, and a display (of the assortment list) on the screen.

Figure 81: Contents of the Assortment List

The assortment list contains selected data of the article maintenance, which is relevant for the assortment user (store or customer). A source of supply is determined for the articles, so that the store knows with whom to place orders (several vendors are also possible here). Transactional data could also be read here (promotion, allocation tables, purchase orders). This data should support the requirements planning of a store, for example. However, note that an evaluation of this data has a significant effect on performance. Store layout information is available for creating shelf-edge labels, for article placement, and for planning by visual inspection of the shelves.

184

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment List

Customizing Settings for the Assortment List

Figure 82: Assortment List Type

For each assortment list type, you can create your own cycle control for the preparation of assortment lists. The cycle control includes: • • •

The lead time The cycle for generating change versions The number of change versions until a full version of the assortment list is created

One assortment list type can be assigned to every article. An assortment list type must be assigned to an article if the article is to appear in the assortment list. It is recommended to create just a few types assortment list types in the same way as article types were created. The control of the logistic quantities uses the parameters for the assortment list to determine which transaction data (for example, previous purchase orders) should be read for an assortment list. To be able to do this, you must have already maintained the assortment list types. You specify a logistical unit of measure - for example, a purchase order quantity or a quantity to be allocated - for each of the various assortment list types. If quantities from previous logistical processes (for example, old purchase orders) are to appear in the assortment list, then the past period limits the number of days for which the system searches documents of the relevant article. This prevents the system from reading documents that are too old.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

185

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Figure 83: Assortment List Profile

The assortment list profile groups together the control parameters to generate assortment lists. It can be used for several sites. An assortment list profile can be assigned to every site. Without an assortment list profile, no assortment list can be generated for the site. The assortment list profile parameters control the generation and the appearance of assortment lists. With these parameters, you can determine the following: • • • • • •

Whether IDocs are created for electronic distribution Whether the data is stored in the assortment list version management How the articles are sorted What data is created What an assortment list entry should look like In the assortment list, whether articles should also appear for the sales period (after the listing period is finished)

It is advisable to maintain just a few assortment list profiles. If sites have the same assortment list profile, they are processed more quickly when the assortment lists are generated.

186

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

181

Lesson: Assortment List

Exercise 13: Assortment List Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Request assortment lists and set the corresponding control options.

Business Example You want to inform your store about changes in your assortment, and therefore you use a new assortment list for articles of certain merchandise categories.

Task 1: Generate a new assortment list. 1.

Now generate an assortment list of assortment list type S for site R1##, the merchandise categories RS11110 to RS11120 and distribution channel RG10/R1 by requesting it manually.

2.

Display the assortment list you have created and check the sorting and the validity of your assortment list. Where are these settings made?

Task 2: You are now dealing with the settings for the assortment list in Customizing. 1.

Display the settings for assortment list type S in Customizing.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

187

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

2.

How often is a change version generated before a full version is sent to the store again?

3.

How long is the validity period of a generated assortment list?

Task 3: In the assortment list profile you define how the assortment list should be sorted in the store in question. 1.

Which assortment list profile is assigned to store R1##?

2.

Display the settings for the assortment list type S in the assortment list profile RSUP in Customizing.

Continued on next page

188

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment List

3.

Which sorting procedure is used in profile RSUP in the assortment list type S?

4.

Are layout modules also analyzed in this assortment list setting?

Task 4: Assortment list functions and options 1.

How can the SAP Retail assortment list support the MRP controller? Mention the assortment list functions and options. Which ones are options important for planning by visual inspection? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

2.

Which three prerequisites must be fulfilled so that an article can be included in an assortment list, and so that an assortment list can be created for a store. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

3.

How can articles be grouped together for an assortment list? Name the field in the article master data. ______________________________________________________

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

189

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Solution 13: Assortment List Task 1: Generate a new assortment list. 1.

Now generate an assortment list of assortment list type S for site R1##, the merchandise categories RS11110 to RS11120 and distribution channel RG10/R1 by requesting it manually. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment List → Generate → Manual Selection: Sales Organization

RG10

Distribution Channel

R1

Customer No. -Plant

R1##

Merchandise Category

RS11110 to RS11120

Assortment List Type

S

Choose Program → Execute or F8 2.

Display the assortment list you have created and check the sorting and the validity of your assortment list. Where are these settings made? a)

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment List → Display Sales Organization

RG10

Distribution Channel

R1

Customer No. -Site

R1##

Assortment List Type

S

Time Period for Selection

Today

Program → Execute Sorting is carried out according to vendor and merchandise category, and the validity period is 7 days. The settings for the validity are made in the assortment list type in Customizing, where as the settings for sorting can be made in the assortment list profle for the respective assortment list type in Customizing.

Continued on next page

190

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment List

Task 2: You are now dealing with the settings for the assortment list in Customizing. 1.

Display the settings for assortment list type S in Customizing. a)

2.

IMG: Logistics - General → Assortment → Assortment → Assortment List Types

How often is a change version generated before a full version is sent to the store again? Answer: Four times

3.

How long is the validity period of a generated assortment list? Answer: 7 days

Task 3: In the assortment list profile you define how the assortment list should be sorted in the store in question. 1.

Which assortment list profile is assigned to store R1##? a)

Retailing: Master Data → Site Data → Site → Display

b)

Site R1##

c)

Go to the POS tab The assortment list profile is RSUP.

2.

3.

Display the settings for the assortment list type S in the assortment list profile RSUP in Customizing. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Assortment → Assortment List → Maintain Profile for Assortment Lists

b)

Select the assortment profile RSUP and choose Maintain assortment list profile parameters .

c)

Double-click the assortment list type S.

Which sorting procedure is used in profile RSUP in the assortment list type S? Answer: Sorting procedure 4 - The articles are displayed in the assortment list sorted according to vendor, material group and material number.

4.

Are layout modules also analyzed in this assortment list setting? Answer: No, the indicator for analyzing the layout modules is not set.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

191

Unit 5: Assortment Management

IRT310

Task 4: Assortment list functions and options 1.

How can the SAP Retail assortment list support the MRP controller? Mention the assortment list functions and options. Which ones are options important for planning by visual inspection? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

2.

The assortment list supports the MRP controller in planning by visual inspection insofar as the assortment list can be printed out in paper form, can be sorted according to the layout and can contain the purchase order values.

Which three prerequisites must be fulfilled so that an article can be included in an assortment list, and so that an assortment list can be created for a store. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

3.

a)

An assortment profile must be assigned to the store.

b)

An assortment list type must be assigned to the article.

c)

The article must be listed in the assortment of the store.

How can articles be grouped together for an assortment list? Name the field in the article master data. ______________________________________________________ a)

192

You can use the assortment list type to group together the articles (for example, assortment list type for food, fashion, and so on)

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Assortment List

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create an assortment list for the listed articles • Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the system • Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

193

Unit Summary

IRT310

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the terms assortment and listing, and their use in SAP Retail • Name the different ways of managing assortments • Decide which of these options are suitable for your assortment management • Name the different listing procedures and describe their options • Choose a suitable listing procedure to list articles • Create an assortment list for the listed articles • Create different assortment list types for an individual cycle control in the system • Maintain various assortment list profiles for your stores

194

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 6 Single Articles

189

This unit presents the various ways you can create articles.

Unit Overview This unit explains how you can create an article master record, use the article fast entry, configure the article maintenance for each user, and discontinue articles.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2006/Q2

Create an article master record Name the various article categories Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the organizational units Maintain the individual views in the article master List the integrated mass maintenance options Describe what the article core master data is Explain how you can use the maintenance groups Explain the use of the article monitor Describe the different ways of copying the article Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICAT function Edit a PRICAT catalog item Post a PRICAT catalog item Name the possible uses of the article list Describe the different kinds of article lists Create your own article lists Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

195

Unit 6: Single Articles

• • •

IRT310

Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of its life cycle Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in article discontinuation

Unit Contents Lesson: Creating Articles ......................................................197 Exercise 14: Creating Articles ............................................209 Exercise 15: - optional .....................................................223 Lesson: Article Fast Entry .....................................................230 Exercise 16: Article Fast Entry............................................239 Lesson: PRICAT ................................................................249 Exercise 17: PRICAT ......................................................255 Lesson: Article List..............................................................261 Exercise 18: Article List ...................................................267 Lesson: Configuring the Article Master ......................................271 Exercise 19: Configuring the Article Master ............................279 Lesson: Article Discontinuation ...............................................287 Exercise 20: Article Discontinuation .....................................293

196

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 191

Lesson: Creating Articles

Creating Articles Lesson Duration: 60 Minutes

Lesson Overview This lesson describes how you can create an article master record.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •

Create an article master record Name the various article categories Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the organizational units Maintain the individual views in the article master

There are no instructor notes in this lesson.

Business Example You include a new article in your assortment and you need to maintain the data necessary for supply chain processes. The employees who work with the article master in different areas should only be able to process the data that is relevant to them. Your stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any new articles that are being added to your assortment. Due to a particular article’s poor sales figures, you decide to remove it from your store’s assortment.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

197

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Structuring the Article Master

Figure 84: Article Master Record Definition

Figure 85: Article Categories

Single articles are articles that don’t have any characteristics in common with other articles, for example unscented cleaning agents. Generic articles with variants are articles that only differ from one another in certain characteristics values, for example, colors or sizes. Structured articles are made up of several different articles. You must enter components and quantities which are used for the components in the structured articles. The display is a number of single articles or variants of one or more generic articles, which is purchased as an individual article, and therefore has as an article number and purchasing price, and purchase price conditions. The manufacturer or vendor prepares the display.

198

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

A sales set is a number of single articles or variants of one or more generic articles, which is sold as an individual article, and therefore has an own article number and sales price, and sales price conditions. Purchasing sets are already purchased as sets, are managed as a set right through the supply chain and are sold as a set or as individual components. A prepack consists of a number of variants of one or more generic articles, is purchased as an individual article, and therefore has an article number, a purchase price and purchase price conditions. Unlike displays, the components of a prepack must belong to the same merchandise category as the prepack itself.

Figure 86: Article Maintenance Views

The basic data of an article incorporates all client-wide-valid data of an article, which is valid regardless of the vendors who supply the article or the sites in which the article is carried. The following belong to the basic data: units of measure, EANs, article groupings, control data for internal processes (for example, assortment list types), validity data, different texts, characteristics from merchandise categories and possibly other freely definable classification data. In listing, you determine in which sites an article is to be carried and in which period inbound deliveries can be received and sales are possible. In the purchasing data, a connection is created between articles and vendors/purchasing organizations. Sales data controls the sale of an article in a distribution chain. The sales data contains sales prices and internal control data for shipping.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

199

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Important logistics data for the distribution centers and stores is recorded in the logistics views. It includes requirements planning parameters and forecasting data. The POS (Point of Sale) data contains POS-specific data in addition to POS receipt texts. In addition to article-relevant data, an article master record contains data from other areas that are relevant for the article. These areas are called user departments in the article master. Unnecessary data storage is avoided when all data is stored in a single database object.

Figure 87: Organizational Levels and Views

200

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Possible organizational data entries for the individual views: • • •

•

•

•

There are no restrictions to basic data. You can restrict the listing when you access the article master: sales organization and distribution channel . In order to be able to create purchasing data, you must enter a purchasing organization and a vendor. You have the option of restricting the validity to a site and/or vendor sub-range (VSR). Sales data can only be maintained for the combination sales organization distribution channel. Additionally, sales data can be maintained at site level or price list level (wholesale customers). The logistics data can be maintained for one distribution center or one store, or for the reference sites. If it is maintained for the reference sites, then it is automatically maintained for all sites. Reference sites are defined in Customizing. There is a reference distribution center and a client-wide valid reference store or reference stores at distribution chain level. Don’t specify one particular site or distribution center in the initial screen; instead always maintain the data of the reference site. You must enter at least a distribution chain to completely maintain the POS data.

The data that is maintained in a view can be valid for various organizational levels.

Figure 88: Reference Article

Due to the large amount of data in the article maintenance, templates are available when you create article master records.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

201

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Reference articles provide default values when you create and enhance article data. All data that has been created for the reference articles can be made available, except EANs, consumption values, forecast values, and prices and conditions (for purchasing and sales). The merchandise category reference article is a template for all articles created in that merchandise category. The merchandise category reference article is automatically determined from the merchandise category when the new article is created. You can override this merchandise category reference article by specifying another article as a template.

Figure 89: Procedure for Creating Articles

202

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Article Types

Figure 90: Article Types

Articles with similar attributes are divided into groups and assigned to an article type. Every article master record has to be assigned to just one article type. Article types can be defined in Customizing. Certain article types common to retail are delivered in the standard system, but these can be changed or deleted at any time, or article types can be added. Usually the trading goods (HAWA) article type is used for articles from the non-food and hardware area.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

203

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 91: Article Types - Control Options

The article type determines: • • • • • • •

204

Which user areas (user departments) can be entered for articles of this article type What type of procurement is allowed What type of inventory management is planned for the article (quantity/value-update) Which stock and consumption accounts are assigned Whether the article number is assigned internally or externally Which fields are available in a screen and how they are to be populated valuation details: group of valuation classes in the account category reference; price control (moving average price, standard price)

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Number Assignment

Figure 92: Number Assignment

You have to provide a unique number every time you create an article master record. There are two types of number assignment: •

Internal Number Assignment: In this case, the SAP system assigns the numbers. The number that has been assigned can be found within the permitted number range interval.

•

External Number Assignment: In this case, the user assigns the numbers. The intervals for external the number assignment check can be determined numerically and alphanumerically.

You determine the number range intervals for groups. You assign one or more article types to each group. If you assign an article type to a group then you can therewith determine an internal and an external number range interval for each article type. If you group together several article types into one group, then you can also determine an internal and an external number range interval. This means that several article types can have the same number range intervals. As an attribute of the article type, in the activity Define Attributes of Article Types, you have already determined whether or not an external number assignment is to be checked by a number range.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

205

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 93: European Article Number (EAN)

Different units of measure can be used when dealing with an article. You can create a European Article Number (EAN) for each existing unit of measure of an article (order unit, delivery unit, and so on). An EAN uniquely identifies an article in a specific unit of measure. It is also possible to assign several EANs to one unit of measure. If you do this, one EAN needs to be flagged as the main EAN (for example, several vendors with vendor EANs for an article and a separate internal EAN). The EAN category controls the assignment and checking of an EAN entered in the system. •

•

The next free number is determined from the number range (in case of internal assignment) and a number keyed in is checked against the number range when an external number range was specified in the EAN category. The check-digit algorithm issues the check-digit in an internally assigned number and checks the check-digit when an EAN is keyed in.

To assign perishables- and weight-EANs you must enter your own number ranges in a special number range object (EANGEWICHT) and choose the relevant check algorithms.

Mass Changes to Master Data The maintenance of master data (for example for vendors or purchase orders) can take a very long time if you have to carry out every change individually. You can edit the master data much quicker if you only have to carry out a change once, and if the system then automatically updates all data records in question. Mass maintenance tools are made available for this purpose. You can use these tools to change a large number of master data records at once.

206

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Figure 94: Mass Maintenance of Master Data

You can call such a tool from various master data transactions (for example, from the article master menu area) or by choosing Logistics -> Central Functions -> Mass Maintenance. If you call one of these tools from the master data maintenance, the object type that is to be changed (for example, the customer) is already set by default. You call the mass maintenance tool by choosing Logistics → Central Functions → Mass Maintenance. In this case, you must select the object that is to be changed (for example, customer or vendor). However, the mass maintenance transaction is also integrated into the individual area menus (for example, Master Data → Vendor Data → Environment → Mass Maintenance). In this case, the object is already set by default. As the next step, you select the tables that are to be changed. You restrict the data records that are to be changed, by -for example - selecting all articles, with their short texts containing the character string “screw”. The system selects the data records. Depending on the number of data records that are selected, the system may ask if you want to continue to work online, or if you want to execute the changes in the background. If you choose the second option, a workflow later informs you that the changes have been carried out. If you continue to work online, the system displays the selected data records. In the next step, select the fields that are to be changed. Enter the new value in the relevant column, select the column header and the data records that are to be changed, and select Change field values. Save the changes you have made. The system carries out a consistency check for the changed data. The system does not carry out any changes that would lead to data inconsistencies, and records this in the log. The system issues a log about the

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

207

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

changes that have been carried out, and about any errors that have occurred. In certain applications, you can call up the objects that contain errors in change mode to correct the errors. To do this, select Change object. You should only use this mass maintenance tool to change customer or vendor master data. You do have the option of changing articles, but there are other, better performing mass maintenance tools. Transaction MASS_MARC is used to change logistics data. The Integrated Mass Change (transaction WRFMASSMAT) can be used to change other article data.

208

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

203

Lesson: Creating Articles

Exercise 14: Creating Articles Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a single article for an existing merchandise category

Business Example You add chocolate cookies to your assortment and therefore create a new article master record in the system.

Task 1: Create an article master record for your new article. 1.

The article number A1## should be assigned to the article. You create the article with the article type HAWA in the merchandise category RS11310 (Cookies/Crackers) with the article category 00 Single Article.

2.

You usually work in the Basic Data and Listing views with the distribution chain RG10/R1. To reduce the time and effort involved in this work, you want to permanently retain this selection, which is required each time you make changes.

3.

You also want to maintain the Purchasing, Sales, Logistics: Distribution Center, Logistics: Store, and POS views. The article is delivered by vendor RS1103 and the responsible purchasing organization is R300.

Task 2: When you confirm your entries by choosing Enter, you go to the Basic Data view of the article. 1.

The article has the description: Chocolate cookies 250g packet. Enter this as the article short text.

2.

The base unit of measure for the article is each (piece). The cookies are always ordered in cartons containing 24 pieces. Assign the unit of measure CAR to the article with the corresponding conversion in pieces, and flag carton as an order unit.

3.

In the unit of measure EA, the cookies have a gross weight of 260 grams and a net weight of 250 grams. You want to create measurements for packing in cartons. The carton is 60cm long, 40cm wide and 30cm high. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

209

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

4.

Alternatively, you can purchase the cookies by the pallet. Create the appropriate unit of measure for this, so that each pallet contains 432 cartons of cookies.

5.

You use your own instore EANs for base units of measure. Let the system assign an internal EAN. Select the EAN category provided for this unit of measure.

Task 3: Then maintain the listing view of the article. 1.

In the listing view, you determine to which assortments the article should be assigned.

2.

Your article is going to be included in all the general assortments of the distribution chain RG10/R1, but only if the merchandise category with the assortment grade of the article is also assigned to the corresponding assortment. Which listing procedure do you choose for distribution centers and for stores? ______________________________________________________

3.

You copy the proposed listing period for the stores and distribution centers. However, the article is sold in stores from the 1st of the following month until December 31, 9999.

4.

As you have recently decided to use the general assortments for your stores, to reduce the number of listing conditions, you do not include local assortments in your article listings.

5.

You also want to decide manually for which assortments the article will be listed. Therefore you display all assortments that are proposed for listing. Now execute listing.

6.

View the listing result and copy all proposed assortments.

Task 4: Now enter the purchasing data of the article. 1.

Go to the Purchasing view and maintain the vendor-relevant data.

2.

Which unit of measure is defaulted as the order unit of measure? ______________________________________________________

3.

You want to be able to order the chocolate cookies in cartons and in pallets. Which indicator should you choose?

Continued on next page

210

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

4.

The article belongs to the vendor subrange 000001 (Cookies). Which purchasing group is set by default? The minimum purchase order quantity for the vendor is 5 cartons. The planned delivery time is 3 days.

5.

You have negotiated a net purchasing price of USD 0.75 each with your vendor, and you define this net purchasing price in the system.

Task 5: You now maintain all sales-related data of the article. 1.

Call the Sales view.

2.

Which purchasing price does the system default as the basis for calculating the sales price? ______________________________________________________ Which unit of measure is the purchasing price based on? ______________________________________________________

3.

The system sets a default sales price for the article. What is this price? ______________________________________________________

4.

What is the markup with which the system calculates this price? ______________________________________________________

5.

You change the final price of the article to 0.89 USD/EA. What markup does the system calculate now?

6.

You want to use the price 0.89 USD as the sales price. Ensure the indicator for saving the calculated prices has been set.

Task 6: You now enter the logistics data for the article. 1.

Now maintain the logistics data for the distribution centers. Which RP type is used to plan the article for distribution centers?

2.

The article is ordered every Wednesday from the vendor for the distribution centers. Which key determines this setting? ______________________________________________________

3.

2006/Q2

Now enter logistics data for the stores. To do this, go to the Logistics: store tab. Since an explicit reference store is not maintained for distribution chain RG10/R1, you possibly must confirm the error message: There is no reference store for distribution chain RG10/R1 and then clear the Sales Organization and Distribution Channel fields in the Validity Area dialog box. Continued on next page

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

211

Unit 6: Single Articles

4.

IRT310

In the stores, the article should always be ordered from a distribution center by means of a stock transfer. Which key controls this? ______________________________________________________ Select the appropriate key for your article.

Task 7: Finally, now maintain some data especially relevant for the POS management. To do this, choose the POS tab. 1.

At the cash register, there should be a till receipt text which says: Chocolate Cookies, 250g. Create this till receipt text in your own language for the unit of measure “EA”. Save your article.

Task 8: After you have created your article, you want to make some changes to your article data. 1.

To do this, call the article master of article A1## again.

2.

Create the manufacturer EAN for the unit of measure carton. The manufacturer EAN is a 12-digit number with a check digit in accordance with the standard EAN check digit algorithm (a total of 13 digits). Select the EAN category provided for this, enter the first 12 digits of the manufacturer EAN (3000000000##) and let the system default the check digit automatically.

3.

Where can you enter more EANs for the unit of measure EA? What do you have to look out for when allocating several EANs for the same unit of measure? ___________________________________________

4.

Go to the Layout Modules screen and check whether your article A1## has already been assigned to a layout module. Then assign layout module 4 (General module) to the article.

5.

Which texts can you maintain for this article using the additional data? ___________________________________________

6.

212

Go back to the Basic data and save your article.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Solution 14: Creating Articles Task 1: Create an article master record for your new article. 1.

The article number A1## should be assigned to the article. You create the article with the article type HAWA in the merchandise category RS11310 (Cookies/Crackers) with the article category 00 Single Article. a)

2.

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Create Article

A1##

Article Type

HAWA Trading goods (excl. perishables)

Merchandise Category

RS11310

Article Category

00 Single article

You usually work in the Basic Data and Listing views with the distribution chain RG10/R1. To reduce the time and effort involved in this work, you want to permanently retain this selection, which is required each time you make changes. a)

3.

Sales Organization

RG10

Distribution Channel

R1

b)

Choose Default Areas of Validity

c)

Select the Basic Data and Listing views

d)

Choose Default Views

You also want to maintain the Purchasing, Sales, Logistics: Distribution Center, Logistics: Store, and POS views. The article is delivered by vendor RS1103 and the responsible purchasing organization is R300. a)

Also select the Purchasing, Sales, Logistics: Distribution Center, Logistics: Store and POS views. Purchasing Organization

R300

Vendor

RS1103 Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

213

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Task 2: When you confirm your entries by choosing Enter, you go to the Basic Data view of the article. 1.

The article has the description: Chocolate cookies 250g packet. Enter this as the article short text. a) Article Short Text

2.

Chocolate cookies 250g packet

The base unit of measure for the article is each (piece). The cookies are always ordered in cartons containing 24 pieces. Assign the unit of measure CAR to the article with the corresponding conversion in pieces, and flag carton as an order unit. a)

b) 3.

AUoM

CAR

Number

24

LUn

EA

To flag cartons as an order unit of measure, set the radiobutton for OUn to CAR.

In the unit of measure EA, the cookies have a gross weight of 260 grams and a net weight of 250 grams.

Continued on next page

214

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

You want to create measurements for packing in cartons. The carton is 60cm long, 40cm wide and 30cm high. a)

b)

4.

In the field group Units of measure/EANs/dimensions, scroll across and for the unit of measure EA enter the following data in the relevant fields: Gross Weight

260

Net Weight

250

Wt

G

In the field group Units of measure/EANs/dimensions, scroll back and for the unit of measure CAR enter the following data in the relavant fields: Length

60

Width

40

Height

30

Unit of Dimension

cm

Alternatively, you can purchase the cookies by the pallet. Create the appropriate unit of measure for this, so that each pallet contains 432 cartons of cookies. a)

5.

AUoM

PAL

Number

432

LUn

EA

You use your own instore EANs for base units of measure. Let the system assign an internal EAN. Select the EAN category provided for this unit of measure. a)

In the Ct field, enter IE for unit of measure EA.

b)

Check screen data

c)

Confirm the warning message by choosing Check screen data

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

215

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Task 3: Then maintain the listing view of the article. 1.

In the listing view, you determine to which assortments the article should be assigned. a)

2.

Go to the Listing tab

Your article is going to be included in all the general assortments of the distribution chain RG10/R1, but only if the merchandise category with the assortment grade of the article is also assigned to the corresponding assortment. Which listing procedure do you choose for distribution centers and for stores? ______________________________________________________ a)

3.

LP for store categories

B1

LP for distribution center category

B1

You copy the proposed listing period for the stores and distribution centers. However, the article is sold in stores from the 1st of the following month until December 31, 9999. a)

4.

6.



For sale till

December 31, 9999

As you have recently decided to use the general assortments for your stores, to reduce the number of listing conditions, you do not include local assortments in your article listings. a)

5.

For sale from

Deselect the Local Assortments Also checkbox

You also want to decide manually for which assortments the article will be listed. Therefore you display all assortments that are proposed for listing. Now execute listing. a)

Select the Maint. assorts man. checkbox

b)

Choose Execute Listing

View the listing result and copy all proposed assortments. a)

Choose Copy Continued on next page

216

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Task 4: Now enter the purchasing data of the article. 1.

Go to the Purchasing view and maintain the vendor-relevant data. a)

2.

Go to the Purchasing tab

Which unit of measure is defaulted as the order unit of measure? ______________________________________________________ a)

3.

You want to be able to order the chocolate cookies in cartons and in pallets. Which indicator should you choose? a)

4.

Order Unit Carton (CAR)

Variable Order Unit = 1

The article belongs to the vendor subrange 000001 (Cookies). Which purchasing group is set by default? The minimum purchase order quantity for the vendor is 5 cartons. The planned delivery time is 3 days. a)

5.

Vendor Subrange

000001

Minimum Qty

5

Pl. Deliv. Time

3

PurchasingGroup

R30

You have negotiated a net purchasing price of USD 0.75 each with your vendor, and you define this net purchasing price in the system. a) Net Price

0.75 USD each

Task 5: You now maintain all sales-related data of the article. 1.

Call the Sales view. a)

2.

Go to the Sales tab

Which purchasing price does the system default as the basis for calculating the sales price? ______________________________________________________ Which unit of measure is the purchasing price based on? Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

217

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

______________________________________________________ a) 3.

Net purchasing price = 0.75 USD, based on the base unit of measure EA.

The system sets a default sales price for the article. What is this price? ______________________________________________________ a)

4.

The proposed final price is 0.99 USD/EA.

What is the markup with which the system calculates this price? ______________________________________________________ a)

5.

32%

You change the final price of the article to 0.89 USD/EA. What markup does the system calculate now? a) Final price

0.89

The new markup is now 18.667%. 6.

You want to use the price 0.89 USD as the sales price. Ensure the indicator for saving the calculated prices has been set. a)

Set the Save Calculated Price indicator.

Task 6: You now enter the logistics data for the article. 1.

Now maintain the logistics data for the distribution centers. Which RP type is used to plan the article for distribution centers? a)

Logistics: DC tab, RP Parameters subscreen. RP Type

2.

R1= Time-phased planning

The article is ordered every Wednesday from the vendor for the distribution centers. Which key determines this setting? ______________________________________________________ a)

In the Stock planner/replenishment data subscreen: Planning cycle

P02 = Order Day Wednesday

Continued on next page

218

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

3.

4.

Now enter logistics data for the stores. To do this, go to the Logistics: store tab. Since an explicit reference store is not maintained for distribution chain RG10/R1, you possibly must confirm the error message: There is no reference store for distribution chain RG10/R1 and then clear the Sales Organization and Distribution Channel fields in the Validity Area dialog box. a)

Logistics: store tab

b)

If necessary confirm the error message by choosing Enter and then clear the Sales Organization and Distribution Channel fields in the Validity Area dialog box.

In the stores, the article should always be ordered from a distribution center by means of a stock transfer. Which key controls this? ______________________________________________________ Select the appropriate key for your article. a)

Go to the Stock planner/replenishment data subscreen Supply source

2 (Stock Transfer)

This means that an internal supply source (a distribution center) is required in the case of procurement transactions for stores.

Task 7: Finally, now maintain some data especially relevant for the POS management. To do this, choose the POS tab. 1.

At the cash register, there should be a till receipt text which says: Chocolate Cookies, 250g. Create this till receipt text in your own language for the unit of measure “EA”. Save your article. a)

b)

Language

EN

AUn

EA

Till receipt

Chocolate cookies, 250g

Article → Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

219

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Task 8: After you have created your article, you want to make some changes to your article data. 1.

To do this, call the article master of article A1## again. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Material Data → Material → Change Article

2.

3.

A1##

Create the manufacturer EAN for the unit of measure carton. The manufacturer EAN is a 12-digit number with a check digit in accordance with the standard EAN check digit algorithm (a total of 13 digits). Select the EAN category provided for this, enter the first 12 digits of the manufacturer EAN (3000000000##) and let the system default the check digit automatically. a)

For the unit of measure Carton in EAN/UPC, enter 3000000000##.

b)

For Ct enter HE

c)

Select the indicator AP (determine check digit for EAN automatically)

d)

Choose Check Screen Data

Where can you enter more EANs for the unit of measure EA? What do you have to look out for when allocating several EANs for the same unit of measure? ___________________________________________

4.

a)

Choose Additional data and go to the Additional EANs tab.

b)

One EAN for each unit of measure must be selected as the main EAN (indicator: M).

Go to the Layout Modules screen and check whether your article A1## has already been assigned to a layout module. Then assign layout module 4 (General module) to the article. a)

5.

Choose Additional Data and the go to the Layout Modules tab. Alt. Unit

EA

Layout Module

4

Which texts can you maintain for this article using the additional data? ___________________________________________ a)

Short text, Basic data text, Sales text, Inspection text Continued on next page

220

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

6.

2006/Q2

Go back to the Basic data and save your article. a)

Choose Main Data

b)

Material → Save

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

221

Unit 6: Single Articles

222

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

217

Lesson: Creating Articles

Exercise 15: - optional Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Define internal number range intervals for EANs • Define the attributes of the EAN • Use the EAN in the article master

Business Example In future, you would also like to manage self-defined EANs for your article in the system.

Task 1: Define a new EAN category that is to use its own number range. 1.

Firstly, you need to create a number range for the EANs you define yourself. As the interval number, select 20+ ; the interval areas are defined as follows: Group 01

10000101 - 10000200

Group 02

10000201 - 10000300

Group 03

10000301 - 10000400

Group 04

10000401 - 10000500

Group 05

10000501 - 10000600

Group 06

10000601 - 10000700

Group 07

10000701 - 10000800

Group 08

10000801 - 10000900

Group 09

10000901 - 10001000

Group 10

10001001 - 10001100

Group 11

10001101 - 10001200

Group 12

10001201 - 10001300

Group 13

10001301 - 10001400

Group 14

10001401 - 10001500

Group 15

10001501 - 10001600 Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

223

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Group 16

10001601 - 10001700

Group 17

10001701 - 10001800

Group 18

10001801 - 10001900

The inserted number range interval must be assigned internally. Hint: When you save, a transport system message appears that you can ignore by choosing Enter. What does the current number field mean? Use the F1 Help to make a note of this. 2.

You now wish to create your own EAN category. The EAN category number corresponds to your group number: Your EAN category has the description Test EAN Group##. The number range object for your EAN should be EUROPARTNR and you should use the number range created under 1 as the internal number range. Enter the standard EAN check digit algorithm as the check digit algorithm.

Task 2: You now want to use the EAN category you just created to assign your own EANs to your articles.

224

1.

Create the new unit of measure PAC for the article A1## (1 PAC [pack] = 72 EA [pieces]).

2.

Assign the EAN category that you created to the new unit of measure. Only check the EAN that is set by default. Do not save the change to your article.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Solution 15: - optional Task 1: Define a new EAN category that is to use its own number range. 1.

Firstly, you need to create a number range for the EANs you define yourself. As the interval number, select 20+ ; the interval areas are defined as follows: Group 01

10000101 - 10000200

Group 02

10000201 - 10000300

Group 03

10000301 - 10000400

Group 04

10000401 - 10000500

Group 05

10000501 - 10000600

Group 06

10000601 - 10000700

Group 07

10000701 - 10000800

Group 08

10000801 - 10000900

Group 09

10000901 - 10001000

Group 10

10001001 - 10001100

Group 11

10001101 - 10001200

Group 12

10001201 - 10001300

Group 13

10001301 - 10001400

Group 14

10001401 - 10001500

Group 15

10001501 - 10001600

Group 16

10001601 - 10001700

Group 17

10001701 - 10001800

Group 18

10001801 - 10001900

The inserted number range interval must be assigned internally. Hint: When you save, a transport system message appears that you can ignore by choosing Enter. What does the current number field mean? Use the F1 Help to make a note of this.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

225

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master → Settings for Key Fields → International Article Numbers (EANs) → Define Number Ranges for EANs/UPCs

b)

Choose Change intervals → Edit → Insert interval As the interval number, select 20+ ; the interval areas are defined as follows: Group 01

10000101 - 10000200

Group 02

10000201 - 10000300

Group 03

10000301 - 10000400

Group 04

10000401 - 10000500

Group 05

10000501 - 10000600

Group 06

10000601 - 10000700

Group 07

10000701 - 10000800

Group 08

10000801 - 10000900

Group 09

10000901 - 10001000

Group 10

10001001 - 10001100

Group 11

10001101 - 10001200

Group 12

10001201 - 10001300

Group 13

10001301 - 10001400

Group 14

10001401 - 10001500

Group 15

10001501 - 10001600

Group 16

10001601 - 10001700

Group 17

10001701 - 10001800

Group 18

10001801 - 10001900

c)

Do NOT select the Ext checkbox.

d)

What is the significance of the Current number field (F1)? In the case of internal number range intervals, the Current number field contains the last number that was assigned last.

e)

Use F3 (green arrow) to go back.

f)

Save Hint: When you save, a transport system message appears; choose Enter to confirm it. Continued on next page

226

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

2.

You now wish to create your own EAN category. The EAN category number corresponds to your group number: Your EAN category has the description Test EAN Group##. The number range object for your EAN should be EUROPARTNR and you should use the number range created under 1 as the internal number range. Enter the standard EAN check digit algorithm as the check digit algorithm. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master → Settings for Key Fields → International Article Numbers (EANs) → Define Attributes of EANs/UPCs

b)

Choose New Entries

c)

Make the following entries:

d)

EAN Category

##

Description

EAN Group ##

Number range object

EUROPARTNR

Int. number range



Check-digit algor.

1

Table View → Save

Task 2: You now want to use the EAN category you just created to assign your own EANs to your articles. 1.

Create the new unit of measure PAC for the article A1## (1 PAC [pack] = 72 EA [pieces]). a)

Retailing: Master Data → Material Data → Material → Change

b)

Select the Basic data view.

c)

In the Units of measure/EANs/dimensions field group: AUoM

PAC

Number

72

LUn

EA

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

227

Unit 6: Single Articles

2.

IRT310

Assign the EAN category that you created to the new unit of measure. Only check the EAN that is set by default. Do not save the change to your article. a)

Enter the EAN category ## in the Ct field

b)

Choose Enter

c)

Check that the number range interval that you created is now taken into account and that the check number is correct. Do NOT save the entries you have made.

228

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating Articles

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create an article master record • Name the various article categories • Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the organizational units • Maintain the individual views in the article master

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

229

Unit 6: Single Articles

Lesson: 224

IRT310

Article Fast Entry Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview Using the different options for article fast entry

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • •

List the integrated mass maintenance options Describe what the article core master data is Explain how you can use the maintenance groups Explain the use of the article monitor Describe the different ways of copying the article

You can use the article core master data function to create an article from an application without having to exit from the application. For example, if you create a purchase order and an article is missing, call up core master data editing from the purchase order, create the article, and post it. You can now use it directly in the purchase order.

Business Example You work as a purchasing agent in a company and are also responsible for maintaining articles. You should be able to create and change articles as efficiently as possible.

Article Core Master Data Article core master data are regular articles that are generated by an external application. In this way, for example, this function is integrated into the SAP Retail Purchase Order Manager function. This means that the user can create missing articles without exiting from the purchase order function. When the relevant settings are made, these articles only have the article segments or article data that is required in the purchase order.

230

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Figure 95: Article Core Master Data: Definition

To be able to use such articles in all functions, they must be completed. To distinguish between articles that were generated with the standard function, you should flag core master data with an entry in the Creation Status field on the Basic data view of the article (Table MARA). You can use this status to select article core master data directly in the article monitor for the further processing.

Figure 96: Article Core Master Data: Maintenance

Maintenance Groups Maintenance groups are required to create article core master data and to maintain articles via integrated of the mass maintenance.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

231

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 97: Maintenance Groups: Definition

A maintenance group contains a number of fields that can be maintained. In Customizing, the fields are grouped together into field groups according to their dependencies. A field group contains all fields that must be maintained together. For example, you can maintain the cross-site maintenance status and the corresponding date at the same time; this means that both fields are assigned to a field group. You have the option of creating customer-specific field groups. In order to achieve an application-specific separation of the fields to be maintained, for each application one or more maintenance groups can be created. Different field groups can be assigned to these maintenance groups. Field groups can be assigned to several maintenance groups. For each maintenance group, one or more templates can be created, in which default values are maintained for the fields in the field group. To uniquely identify article core master data, a template should be used to assign a value in the Creation Status field. This creation status is used in the article monitor to select article core master data that must be completed.

232

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Figure 98: Ways to use Maintenance Groups

Maintenance groups make it easier to edit or display articles by restricting the number of available fields. You can use maintenance groups to define - via the assigned field groups - which fields are used or displayed in individual applications. •

•

2006/Q2

When processing Article Core Master Data and in the Integrated Mass Change, you use maintenance groups to, for example, flexibly define the fields that are displayed for processing. In the Article List and in the Article Monitor, you use maintenance groups to, for example, determine fields that are displayed in the results list.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

233

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 99: Mass Maintenance of Master Data

You can call such a tool from various master data transactions (for example, from the article master, the markdown planning master, and so on) or by choosing Logistics -> Central Functions -> Mass Maintenance. If you call one of these tools from the master data maintenance, the object type that is to be changed (for example, the customer) is already preconfigured. You call the mass maintenance tool by choosing Logistics → Central Functions → Mass Maintenance. In this case, you must select the object that is to be changed (for example, customer or vendor). However, the mass maintenance transaction is also integrated into the individual area menus (for example, Master Data → Vendor Data → Environment → Mass Maintenance). In this case, the object is already set by default. Then select the tables that are to be changed. You restrict the data records that are to be changed, by - for example - searching for all articles, the short text of which contains the character string “bolt”. The system selects the data records. Depending on the number of data records that are found, the system asks if you want to continue to work online, or if you want to execute the changes in the background. If you choose the second option, a workflow later informs you that the changes have been carried out. If you continue to work online, the system displays the selected data records. Now select the tables that are to be changed. Enter the new value in the relevant column, select the column header and the data records that are to be changed and select Change field values. Save the changes you have made. The system carries out a consistency check for the changed data. The system does not carry out any changes that would lead to data inconsistencies, and records this in the log. The system issues a log about the

234

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

changes that have been carried out, and about any errors that have occurred. In certain applications, you can call up the objects that contain errors in change mode to correct the errors. To do this, select Change Object. You should only use this mass maintenance tool to change customer or vendor master data. You do have the option of changing articles too, but there are other, better performing mass maintenance tools for this purpose. Transaction MASS_MARC is used to change logistics data. You can use the Integrated Mass Change transaction (transaction WRFMASSMAT) to change other article data.

Integrated Mass Change • • •

The integrated mass change is a simple and quick way of changing existing articles. The maintenance dialog allows you to change basic article data and additional data, such as info records. The changeable fields are restricted when you use maintenance groups.

The structure of the integrated mass change is based on the structure of the logistics/replenishment mass maintenance. The fields that are to be changed are determined by a maintenance group. Every field is assigned to a maintenance level, and here the maintenance levels correspond to the article master views Basic Data/Purchasing/Sales/Logistics/POS. After you selected the articles that are relevant for the change, the maintenance levels are displayed on the left-hand side of the screen. The currentlz maintained organization levels for the selected articles are displayed as sublevels of the maintenance levels in question. In other words, if the selected article is maintained for the distribution chain RG10/R1 and RG10/R5, the maintenance level Sales has the sublevels RG10/R1 and RG10/R5. After you select a maintenance or sublevel, the relevant articles appear in list format on the right-hand side of the screen. You can execute the integrated mass change as an independent function or from other functions, for example from the article monitor. Only the integrated mass maintenance application gives you the option of temporarily changing maintenance groups, which means that you can add additional changeable fields. You can also create a user-specific default maintenance group for the mass maintenance.

Article Monitor The article monitor makes it easier to promptly add further master data to the article core master data, which means that it can be operatively used as a complete article in all applications.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

235

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 100: Article Monitor

Restrictions are defined in a selection screen, in order to select certain article core master data. The result is displayed in a list, in which the columns are determined by a maintenance group. To complete the article, you can navigate from this list to the new mass maintenance, the article type change transaction or the article maintenance transaction. An article list can also be generated from the selected article core master data.

Article Copy You can use this function to copy article master records to create new article master records or change existing ones. In addition to the main article data, you can also copy additional master data, such as purchasing info records, purchasing and sales conditions, bills of material, and replenishment data. • •

The article copy function allows you to simply and quickly create new articles on the basis of the data of a source article. In contrast to creating a new article using a reference article, the article copy function allows you to either copy all data or to restrict the copy to certain segments (the only restriction is that pricing reference articles are not copied).

The article copy function gives you the option of copying a source article with all created segments and data, thereby creating an identical article. You can then use transaction MM42 to change this article (for example, the article text). Pricing reference articles in generic articles and EANs are not copied.

236

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Figure 101: Article Copy Options

When you create and change article master records, you can determine which data of the source article the system copies. You have the following options when copying articles: •

Copying a source article All field values of the selected segments are copied.

•

Copying a source article with no different fields Copying all field values of the source article with no differences at variant or site level.

•

Individual control of the segments to be copied The copy volume is defined by restricting specific segments, for example, info records, listing conditions or prices.

Follow-Up/Replacement Article You can assign one or more follow-up articles, and one or more replacement articles, to an article (the original article). A follow-up article permanently replaces an original article, while a replacement article only replaces an original article for a certain period of time. You can carry out this assignment at different levels, via local assortments for a site and via general assortments for a group of sites or for all sites. You can display, change and delete existing assignments of follow-up or replacement articles to original articles.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

237

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Articles or article core master data must be created for all articles that are to be assigned. Original articles and follow-up and replacement articles are active articles, in other words they are not logically deleted at basic data level. Original articles and follow-up and replacement articles do not belong to the following article categories: • • • • •

Generic articles Merchandise category value-only articles Merchandise category hierarchy value-only articles Group value-only articles Merchandise category reference articles

In Customizing, define follow-up categories for follow-up and replacement articles and define which checks the system carries out. You can find the Customizing of the follow-up categories in the Implementation Guide (IMG) Logistics - General under Material Master → Retail-Specific Settings → Settings for Follow-Up/Replacement Material → Maintain Follow-Up Categories.

238

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

233

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Exercise 16: Article Fast Entry Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create article core master data • Explain how you can use the maintenance groups • Use the article monitor • Describe the integrated mass maintenance • Carry out the article copy

Business Example You often create core master data. Since you only create data for one vendor and a certain merchandise category, you prepopulate these fields in the maintenance group with which you create core master data. Afterwards you create core master data that is completed via the article monitor. Then you also copy another existing article.

Task 1: Maintenance Groups Answer the following questions: 1.

The following fields are grouped together in a maintenance group. Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □ 2.

A B C D

All article master fields Only fields that are required for a certain application Only basic data fields Basic and logistics data

You want to create a template for an existing maintenance group, so that certain fields are already prepopulated when you create a core article with this maintenance group. To do this, go to the maintenance transaction of the maintenance groups.

3.

Create a template for your maintenance group MG## and enter the following values:

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

239

Unit 6: Single Articles

4.

IRT310

Article Type

FASH

Creation Status

01

Merchandise Category

RF1T0##

Info record category

0

Vendor

R1TV01##

Purchasing Organization

R300

Save the entries you have made.

Task 2: Core Master Data Answer the following questions: 1.

Core master data can ... Choose the correct answer(s).

2.

□ □ □

A B C

□

D

... Only be created out of an application. ... Only be created by a separate transaction. ... Be created from an application and by means of a separate transaction. There is no core master data creation function.

Use the maintenance group, to which you just added a template, to create a core article master record (single article). Select the master data transaction to do this. Under Units of Measure, view the data that was copied from the reference article or from the template. Maintain another unit of measure and select it as order unit. Change the article description of the article in the Descriptions view in article Group ##. Then make sure to choose Enter. List the article in the general assortment R1KIDSS## and maintain the season (0001) and the next year as a season year. Choose Yes to confirm the dialog box that informs you that the listing data is adjusted. Assign it to the hierarchy node with the description School ## (use the search help to search for the relevant ID). Save the core article and make a note of the number. ___________________________________________________

Continued on next page

240

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Task 3: Article Monitor and Mass Maintenance You now deal with the article monitor. Answer the following questions: 1.

In the Article Monitor you can ... Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □ 2.

A B C D

... ... ... ...

Change articles Navigate to the article maintenance (MM42) Navigate to the integrated mass maintenance Navigate to the purchasing info record maintenance

A maintenance group must be selected in the article monitor. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

□ □ 3.

True False

You can use the integrated mass maintenance to create new articles or new article segments. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

□ □

True False

4.

Call the article monitor to complete the article core master record that has just been created, and other core articles that are to be completed. As a selection criterion, use the articles R1TA24##, R1TA30##, R1TA31## and the number of the core article that has just been created.

5.

Amongst other things, the article that you created in the previous exercise is displayed in the results list. You navigate from the list to the mass maintenance.

6.

In the Mass Maintenance, select a maintenance group, by means of which you decide which fields can be changed. You want to change basic and logistics data.

7.

Execute the selection to determine which articles can be changed. In the Basic Data view, change the creation status 01 to blank and maintain the fashion grade 0001 high fashion. Check the Assortment List Type (it should be F) and the Transportation Group and Loading Group fields (it should be 0001 in both cases). In the Logistics: Distribution Center view for the Reference-DC P100, enter the distribution profile FT2 and check that the RP type is ND. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

241

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Save the entries you have made.

Task 4: Article copy Answer the following questions: 1.

When you copy an article, ... Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □

A B C D

... ... ... ...

Always copy the whole article Only ever copy individual segments Decide which data you want to copy You can also copy listing and pricing conditions.

Task 5: Your vendor offers you children’s trousers for a low price. These trousers are similar to children’s trousers that you already carry and that sell well. You accept your vendor’s offer and maintain article master data for the new trousers. You use the trousers, which are already in your assortment, as the copy template. However, only certain variants are copied, since the new trousers are delivered in fewer colours.

242

1.

You copy the source article R1TA03## with all article data, but you restrict the variants to the colours red and royal blue. The article number should be R1TA99##. Copy the article.

2.

Change the article short text of the new article to Children’s Trousers##

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Solution 16: Article Fast Entry Task 1: Maintenance Groups Answer the following questions: 1.

The following fields are grouped together in a maintenance group. Answer: B Only fields that are required for a certain application are grouped together in a maintenance group.

2.

You want to create a template for an existing maintenance group, so that certain fields are already prepopulated when you create a core article with this maintenance group. To do this, go to the maintenance transaction of the maintenance groups. a)

3.

4.

In transaction WRFMGROUP, select your maintenance groups in the tree, choose Change Mode and then Show/Hide.

Create a template for your maintenance group MG## and enter the following values: Article Type

FASH

Creation Status

01

Merchandise Category

RF1T0##

Info record category

0

Vendor

R1TV01##

Purchasing Organization

R300

a)

SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Article → Manage Maintenance Groups

b)

Transaction WRFMGROUP: In the tree, under the Cross-Application node, select your maintenance group MG##.

c)

Choose Change Mode and then Show/Hide. A subscreen appears, which can be used to maintain templates. Enter values in the aforementioned fields.

Save the entries you have made. a)

Choose Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

243

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Task 2: Core Master Data Answer the following questions: 1.

Core master data can ... Answer: C Core master data can be created from an application and by means of a separate transaction.

2.

Use the maintenance group, to which you just added a template, to create a core article master record (single article). Select the master data transaction to do this. Under Units of Measure, view the data that was copied from the reference article or from the template. Maintain another unit of measure and select it as order unit. Change the article description of the article in the Descriptions view in article Group ##. Then make sure to choose Enter. List the article in the general assortment R1KIDSS## and maintain the season (0001) and the next year as a season year. Choose Yes to confirm the dialog box that informs you that the listing data is adjusted. Assign it to the hierarchy node with the description School ## (use the search help to search for the relevant ID). Save the core article and make a note of the number. ___________________________________________________ a)

Path: SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Article → Process Core Master Data

b)

Transaction WRFMATBODY

c)

Use the F4 help to select your maintenance group MG## and the corresponding Template 0001.

d)

The data for the article type, merchandise category and other fields is preassigned. Enter Artl Category 00 (Single Article). Choose Enter.

e)

The views for which data can be maintained are displayed on the left-hand side. Select Units of Measure. The data from the reference article is proposed, and displayed in the right-hand screen area.

f)

Enter another unit of measure (for example, carton) with a corresponding quantity per base unit of measure and weihgt unit and select it as an order unit by selecting the relevant checkbox.

g)

Select the Descriptions view and overwrite the description in the right-hand column for the language EN.

h)

Proceed in this way in the other views, and maintain the required values on the right-hand side of the screen. Save the article. Continued on next page

244

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Task 3: Article Monitor and Mass Maintenance You now deal with the article monitor. Answer the following questions: 1.

In the Article Monitor you can ... Answer: B, C In the article monitor, you can navigate to the article maintenance (MM42) and to the integrated mass maintenance.

2.

A maintenance group must be selected in the article monitor. Answer: False If no maintenance group is selected, the system uses a default maintenance group.

3.

You can use the integrated mass maintenance to create new articles or new article segments. Answer: False This is not possible.

4.

5.

Call the article monitor to complete the article core master record that has just been created, and other core articles that are to be completed. As a selection criterion, use the articles R1TA24##, R1TA30##, R1TA31## and the number of the core article that has just been created. a)

Path: SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Article → Material Monitor.

b)

Transaction WRFMATMON

c)

Enter your articles R1TA24##, R1TA30##, R1TA31## and the core article in the General Article Data subscreen for the selection of the article and choose Execute.

Amongst other things, the article that you created in the previous exercise is displayed in the results list. You navigate from the list to the mass maintenance. a)

6.

In the Mass Maintenance, select a maintenance group, by means of which you decide which fields can be changed. You want to change basic and logistics data. a)

2006/Q2

Select the articles and choose Mass Maintenance.

Choose Select Maintenance Group and use the F4 Help to select an application-specific maintenance group for the mass maintenance. The description of the maintenance group is Mass Changes Basic + Logistics Data Continued on next page

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

245

Unit 6: Single Articles

7.

IRT310

Execute the selection to determine which articles can be changed. In the Basic Data view, change the creation status 01 to blank and maintain the fashion grade 0001 high fashion. Check the Assortment List Type (it should be F) and the Transportation Group and Loading Group fields (it should be 0001 in both cases). In the Logistics: Distribution Center view for the Reference-DC P100, enter the distribution profile FT2 and check that the RP type is ND. Save the entries you have made. a)

Copy the articles into the matrix by double-clicking the Basic Data view in the left-hand screen area. There select the articles that should be changed and choose Fast Entry.

b)

A new subscreen opens in the lower screen area. Maintain the relevant values there. Select the lines and choose Cont..

c)

On the left-hand side of the screen, choose Logistics: Distribution Center and the reference distribution center P100. In the right-hand screen area, change the corresponding values.

d)

Save the entries you have made. When you save, the changes made at the reference distribution center level are transferred to dependent distribution centers, provided that these are not already filled with different values.

Task 4: Article copy Answer the following questions: 1.

When you copy an article, ... Answer: C, D You can decide which data you want to copy, and you can also copy listing and pricing conditions.

Continued on next page

246

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Fast Entry

Task 5: Your vendor offers you children’s trousers for a low price. These trousers are similar to children’s trousers that you already carry and that sell well. You accept your vendor’s offer and maintain article master data for the new trousers. You use the trousers, which are already in your assortment, as the copy template. However, only certain variants are copied, since the new trousers are delivered in fewer colours. 1.

2.

2006/Q2

You copy the source article R1TA03## with all article data, but you restrict the variants to the colours red and royal blue. The article number should be R1TA99##. Copy the article. a)

SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Article → Copy

b)

Transaction WRFMATCOPY

c)

The article R1TA03## is used as the source article and the number R1TA99## is entered as the target article. You do not have to maintain any other data in the Target Material subscreen, since everything is copied from the Source Article. The Underlying Material Data and the Additional Material Data checkboxes are set. However, you choose Variant Filters to select the variants of the colours red (color code 3) and royal blue (color code 51) only.

d)

Choose Execute.

Change the article short text of the new article to Children’s Trousers## a)

SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Article → Change

b)

Transaction MM42

c)

Enter the article number R1TA99##, select the Basic data view and choose Enter. Change the short text to Children’s Trousers##.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

247

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • List the integrated mass maintenance options • Describe what the article core master data is • Explain how you can use the maintenance groups • Explain the use of the article monitor • Describe the different ways of copying the article

248

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 243

Lesson: PRICAT

PRICAT Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you are introduced to the price catalog as a tool for copying article and price information from the vendor to the SAP system.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICAT function Edit a PRICAT catalog item Post a PRICAT catalog item

The price catalog information includes the description, price information and conditions (including taxes), as well as logistics information for each product. It either contains only general product data that is valid for all customers, or customer-specific information, such a special conditions. You can also define a validity period for the price catalog.

Business Example You want your vendor to carry out the majority of the data maintenance, and therefore you obtain the article data from a data pool. You receive sensitive data directly from your vendor and not from the data pool. Before it is posted to your SAP system, you want to check the data that the vendor has provided.

PRICAT: Definition PRICAT processing refers to the function used to transfer article and price information in a standard format. The information can be sent to the retailer bilaterally directly from the vendor, or multilaterally by means of a data pool. The business process allows you to import the logical message type PRICECATALOGUE02. This means you can receive information about new articles or changes to existing articles from a vendor or a data pool. The information is stored in a catalog in the SAP system. The individual catalog items correspond to an SAP article. The catalog items contain the description, conditions (including taxes), and logistics information about the articles.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

249

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Challenges •

• •

The data from an external data pool or from the vendor does not contain all SAP-relevant information, in other words, it was necessary to find a way of enhancing data generically. Large quantities of data must be displayed clearly and must be easy to edit. It must be possible to create different SAP article categories (structured articles, generic articles, and individual articles) from individual data records.

Just one catalog of a vendor is edited at a time. The data of the price catalog, which is hierarchically structured from the viewpoint of the data model, is displayed in a flat view. Generic articles, single articles and bills of material can be displayed and processed. Variants of a generic article and components of bills of materials that belong together are displayed in a block.

PRICAT inbound

Figure 102: Process: PRICAT inbound

250

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: PRICAT

Figure 103: Customizing

From transaction W_PRICAT_MAINTAIN you can navigate to the defaults and data merging maintenance. At client level, the default table is implemented as a Customizing table, since changes have extensive consequences. However, the Client-Vendor and Client-Vendor, Merchandise Category levels are application tables, and the business requirement is to be able to change these tables in the operative system. The default and merging logic can be controlled for each field of the PRICAT data pool. The settings of the fine granular level override the settings of the higher level. Besides the selection of fields which the system displays in online processing and their display settings (e.g. ready for input), you also choose one of five possible storage options, which determine how each PRICAT pool field should be populated. The defaults and enhancement logic is used for both the online processing and batch posting.

Online Processing The online processing was completely redeveloped for ERP2005 and now: • • •

2006/Q2

There is a new dialog interface for the mass data processing Scheduled transfer of data to the R/3 master data is possible Additional PRICAT information, such as generic articles and prices, is now transferred

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

251

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 104: Online Processing Options

When new generic articles are created, one variant must be selected as master variant, from which the data is then copied for the generic article header level and displayed in an extra line. If a generic article (header) is already created, it is displayed in a separate master data line with the hat symbol. Some fields are not displayed in the PRICAT item display, but they can be reached and edited by clicking on the relevant hotspots (for example, the valid-to date of a price condition). There are hotspots for prices, texts, characteristics, units of measure and bills of material. 1 to n columns and 1 to m rows can be selected at the same time. If you choose Mass Maintenance, a dialog box appears on which the selected column names appear again and in which you can enter the required field contents. The field contents are then copied into all lines of the selected columns. If the available selection criteria in transaction W_PRICAT_MAINTAIN: Catalog number, EAN of base UoM, valid-from date, and processing status are not sufficient, a selection report can be generated, the further selection fields of which can be selected within the framework of the report generation. The required selection reports should be generated at the start of a project, for example, by the relevant consultant, but not by the end user. The upper section of the selection screen is static and is always available. The selection fields, which were chosen when the selection report was created, appear in the lower section of the screen. The selection report that applies for a user depends on the profile (on the start screen of W_PRICAT_MAINTAIN). In that profile for the online processing you determine the selection report and variant that is used. For each PRICAT-EAN, the current article master record can be displayed in a separate line. The same applies for the original data record that was sent from the pool. Changed fields can be highlighted in color.

252

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: PRICAT

Figure 105: Online Processing

As soon as you start the process for updating the article master, a padlock symbol appears. After you choose Refresh, you can tell - from the processing status and a traffic light symbol - whether or not posting occurred without problems. A click on the traffic light symbol opens a log that contains error messages.

Figure 106: Posting

The condition technique is used to create prices for all distribution chains in the system and for all purchasing organizations of the vendor, provided no restrictions are defined in online processing and that a corresponding data retention level (condition table) for the organizational level is maintained in Customizing.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

253

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 107: Reorganization

254

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

249

Lesson: PRICAT

Exercise 17: PRICAT Exercise Duration: 40 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the PRICAT function to transfer article and price information

Business Example Before a new season starts, your vendor provides a new catalog with items in a data pool. You copy this data into your SAP system by means of the PRICAT interface, but you want to check and edit the items before you create them as articles in your system.

Task 1: Answer the following questions: 1.

The PRICAT function is used to copy ... Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □ 2.

A B C D

Article data Prices Purchasing data Site data

The PRICAT function can be used to create generic articles. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

□ □

True False

Task 2: 1.

You create your own profile ## to edit the catalog items in the online processing. Specify that you want to display the lines with the original catalog data and the article master. Changes between these lines and the work item line should be highlighted in color.

2.

Now view the defaults maintained at client and vendor level. Which fields are prepopulated with fixed values?

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

255

Unit 6: Single Articles

256

IRT310

3.

Specify the profile you have just created and access the online processing. Use the F4 Help to select the catalog for your vendor R1TV01## and choose Execute.

4.

Create your own user-specific layout with the name LA## and the description Layout##, and add the columns for the article hierarchy ID and the article hierarchy node.

5.

Check if the layout has changed, and that you can see the columns for the article hierarchy ID and the article hierarchy node.

6.

Change the sales price of an item and save the entries. Exit from the catalog.

7.

Call the catalog again and check whether the change was saved.

8.

Now post a single article. Check the status and the traffic light.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: PRICAT

Solution 17: PRICAT Task 1: Answer the following questions: 1.

The PRICAT function is used to copy ... Answer: A, B, C Article data, prices and purchasing data are copied with the PRICAT function.

2.

The PRICAT function can be used to create generic articles. Answer: True The PRICAT function can be used to create generic articles.

Task 2: 1.

2.

You create your own profile ## to edit the catalog items in the online processing. Specify that you want to display the lines with the original catalog data and the article master. Changes between these lines and the work item line should be highlighted in color. a)

Choose IMG -> Sales and Distribution -> Electronic Data Interchange -> PRICAT Inbound -> Configure Online Processing

b)

Choose New Entries to enter a new profile. Enter the ID and the description. Set Incl. Art.Mast and the Incl. Original checkboxes.

c)

Under Compare, specify 3 - Compare with Original and Material Master; under Layout, specify 2 - Item and Units of Measure (Split Screen) and under Save Variant, specify U - Only as User-Specific Variant.

Now view the defaults maintained at client and vendor level. Which fields are prepopulated with fixed values? a)

SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Price Catalog Inbound Processing → Maintain Price Catalog

b)

Then choose Environment -> Default -> Field Catalog or Field Catalog: ILN/Vendor to navigate to transaction W_PRICAT_PRE1 or W_PRICAT_PRE2.

c)

The Valuation Class and Article Type fields are prepopulated at client level. The Article Hierarchy ID and Article Hierarchy Node fields are prepopulated at vendor level. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

257

Unit 6: Single Articles

3.

4.

5.

IRT310

Specify the profile you have just created and access the online processing. Use the F4 Help to select the catalog for your vendor R1TV01## and choose Execute. a)

SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Price Catalog Inbound Processing → Maintain Price Catalog

b)

Transaction W_PRICAT_MAINTAIN

c)

Specify the profile ## and choose Execute.

d)

In the following selection screen, select a catalog by choosing the F4 Help on the Price Catalog field. Restrict the search to your vendor R1TV01##, or display all catalogs and then select the catalog of your vendor by double-clicking it.

e)

Choose Execute to navigate to the online processing.

Create your own user-specific layout with the name LA## and the description Layout##, and add the columns for the article hierarchy ID and the article hierarchy node. a)

Choose Select Layout, and then choose Change Layout from the list.

b)

Copy the Hierarchy and the Hierarchy node columns from the right-hand column to the left-hand column.

c)

Save your layout.

d)

Specify the ID LA## and the description Layout## and select the User-specific and Default setting checkboxes.

e)

Choose Enter.

Check if the layout has changed, and that you can see the columns for the article hierarchy ID and the article hierarchy node. a)

6.

7.

The Hierarchie and Hier.-nodes columns now appear on the screen and the fixed values that were maintained are displayed.

Change the sales price of an item and save the entries. Exit from the catalog. a)

Navigate to the Sales Price field in the Work Item line of an item and change the price to any value.

b)

Select this row and choose Save.

c)

Choose Back (F3) to exit from the catalog.

Call the catalog again and check whether the change was saved. a)

Choose Execute to open the catalog. You see that the changed sales price was saved and is displayed here. It is also highlighted in blue, because the original has been changed. Continued on next page

258

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: PRICAT

8.

Now post a single article. Check the status and the traffic light. a)

Select an item (work item line) that is a single article (article category 00), and choose Create/Change. The padlock symbol appears once the item is posted in the background.

b)

Choose Refresh. The padlock symbol disappears, a third row is added with the article master data, and the status of the item changes to 04 - Forwarded. The traffic light is green.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

259

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICAT function • Edit a PRICAT catalog item • Post a PRICAT catalog item

260

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 255

Lesson: Article List

Article List Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview An article list is a predefined selection of article numbers. It allows you to use a defined group of article numbers across applications.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Name the possible uses of the article list Describe the different kinds of article lists Create your own article lists

This lesson helps participants to familiarize themselves with the article list. Make sure to point out that the article list is available for all functions after it has been defined once.

Business Example You want to make sure that articles from different merchandise categories, which all belong to a program (for example, t-shirt, pants, and skirt in marine-look), are distributed to the stores together. To do this, you create an article list, which is then used in the allocation table, for example.

Uses of the Article List An article list is a predefined selection of article numbers. It allows you to use a defined group of article numbers across applications. Because work is distributed between different system landscapes, a number of articles may be determined in a system and then should be available for further processing in another system. Integrating article lists is particularly useful when using SAP ECC with SAP BI.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

261

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 108: Using the Article List

Figure 109: Article List Type

262

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article List

There are two article list types in SAP Retail: •

Dynamic Article Lists: Dynamic article lists are composed of saved selection criteria which can be used to determine the currently valid range of article numbers.

•

Static Article Lists: Static article lists contain both the selection criteria and the article numbers that matched the selection criteria when the article list was released in the system. For example, if a static article list is generated in SAP BI, only the article numbers are saved in SAP Retail without the selection criterion.

Only static article lists without selection criteria are available for data exchange between SAP BI and SAP Retail.

Creating Article Lists

Figure 110: Article List: Tree Structure

The maintenance screen of the article list is divided into three areas. The article list hierarchy is maintained in the area on the left-hand side. Here, the article lists can be grouped together on a business or application-specific basis. The hierarchies are created under an end node in the right-hand area of the screen. In the hierarchy tree, end nodes with assigned article lists are flagged by a folder symbol, while the other hierarchy nodes are not end nodes or they are end nodes without article list assignments.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

263

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

The header data of the article list is created in the first step: • • •

• •

Name and short text Access status (control: who can maintain/use the article list?) Maintenance group - to define the article fields that should be displayed beside the article number and the article short text in the selection result list (for example, merchandise category, article category, article type). Maximum number of articles to be selected Article List Type: Static: Selection criteria are executed once and the resulting range of articles is saved statically. When the article list is used operatively, only the saved article numbers are read from the database, a new selection is not made. Dynamic: Only the selection criteria are saved. When the article list is used operatively, the selection criteria are evaluated dynamically, and the determined article numbers are returned as result.

•

Validity of the Article List

After you create the header data, choose Edit selection to define the selection criteria that are to be used to determine the resulting range of articles. After the selection criteria have been determined, you can choose the Results List button to determine and display the result. In the case of a static article list, you can change the new article list by choosing the change button in the toolbar in the right-hand screen area of the main maintenance screen. For example, articles, which do not correspond to the selection criteria created previously, can be manually added to the resulting range of articles, or existing articles can be removed. The manually maintained article numbers are saved on the database as an enhancement of the static result list. The deleted article numbers are removed from the database. In the processing screen for the article list header data, you can change the selection conditions by choosing Process Selection Criteria. However, this does not automatically adjust the existing resulting range of articles, because this is saved statically. If you choose Edit Results List, the results list appears. To make a new selection in the case of static article lists, you must choose Update Result. All relevant articles are then listed in the updated result list.

264

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article List

These are articles that: • • • •

Would still be included in the selection subset, even though the selection conditions have been changed (symbol [=]) Would not be included in the selection subset anymore, because the selection criteria have been changed (symbol (-)) Due to changed selection conditions or due to a previous manual deletion, would have been added or added again (symbol (+)) Were added manually and, in accordance with the changed selection conditions, are either included or omitted (“Manual“ indicator)

In the right-hand area of the main maintenance screen, you can also execute the Update Result function if - for example - you have not changed the selection criteria, but, because new articles have been created, you can assume that the selection result may have to be expanded or reduced accordingly. You can also call the Display Material Status function for static article lists. Here, a check is carried out for the articles that are statically saved in the article list, to see whether these articles still exist on the database, or whether the article may have been flagged for deletion. Existing article lists (static and dynamic) can be used within the article search help in basically each transaction in which you can enter an article number. If a multiple selection can be made in the application, more than one article number of the article list can be returned to the application. In the case of applications that can only accept one article number, one article number must be selected from the article list. Article lists have a validity period and can be automatically deleted once the validity period has expired. The Valid To date of an article list can be changed online. In addition to deleting the article list, the validity also controls the display in the F4 Help. The article list can only be selected if the current system date is in the validity interval. The use of article lists is controlled with a status, which is specified as Planned, Released and Released + Not Modifiable. Only the user who created the article list can use article lists that have the status Planned. Released article lists can be used by all users, and the status Released + Not Modifiable guarantees that the definition of the article list cannot change until the validity period has expired (only the validity date itself can still be changed). The article lists created in SAP Retail are available for a simplified selection of articles (extraction) for reporting in SAP BW. The extraction is only possible for static article lists.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

265

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

You can also generate article lists from reporting results in SAP BW and then transfer them to SAP Retail (data retraction). You can do this both when executing a query online and in background processing (offline). The article list supports you in SAP BW when you select article numbers for article-specific evaluations. In SAP BW, in the Business Content, there are objects for mapping article lists. From SAP Retail, these objects are filled with the static article lists created there. Extraction is carried out via three different extractors. The attribute and hierarchy extractors determine their data via separate function modules. Text is extracted via direct access to the tables. You can use the release status as a selection parameter for the attribute extraction. The purpose of the data retraction from SAP BW to SAP Retail is to make a query result, which contains a number of articles, available in SAP Retail, and to save them as a new article list there.

266

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

261

Lesson: Article List

Exercise 18: Article List Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Explain how an article list is created and how it can be used

Business Example You want to create an article list to be used in discontinuation; this article list only contains articles of a vendor with which you will no longer work in future.

Task: Answer the following questions: 1.

An article list is ... Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □ 2.

A B C D

Always dynamic Always static Either static or dynamic Neither static nor dynamic

A static article list consists of selection criteria with which the resulting range of articles is determined with each call. Determine whether this statement is true or false.

□ □

True False

3.

To create an article list, select the node with the name ALGR## in the relevant transaction.

4.

Under AL GR. ##, create a dynamic article list AL## and select your vendor R1TV01## as a selection criterion. Save the article list.

5.

Extend the validity of the article list by a month, and release it. Save these changes.

6.

Check whether the article list is available in the discontinuation workbench. Hint: Do not discontinue the articles!

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

267

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Solution 18: Article List Task: Answer the following questions: 1.

An article list is ... Answer: C An article list is either static or dynamic.

2.

A static article list consists of selection criteria with which the resulting range of articles is determined with each call. Answer: False A static article list consists of the selection criteria and the articles saved for this list.

3.

4.

To create an article list, select the node with the name ALGR## in the relevant transaction. a)

SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Article → Article List → Edit

b)

Transaction WRF_AL

c)

Switch from display mode to change mode. In the article list tree on the left-hand side of the screen, select Master Data and then select the node with the name AL GR. ##.

Under AL GR. ##, create a dynamic article list AL## and select your vendor R1TV01## as a selection criterion. Save the article list.

5.

a)

Select the node AL GR. ## in the article list hierarchy.

b)

Then, in the right-hand screen area, choose Create Article List to add a new article list. Assign the name AL## and make sure that the Static Type flag is not set.

c)

Then select your articles by choosing Edit selection. Then use your vendor R1TV01## as a criterion.

d)

Choose Enter. Choose F3 to navigate back to the initial screen. Save the article list.

Extend the validity of the article list by a month, and release it.

Continued on next page

268

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article List

Save these changes.

6.

a)

The validity and status can be changed in the right-hand screen in the Material List Assignment subscreen. Change the status from 1 Planned to 2 Released. The article list is now available in the F4 Search Help for all users.

b)

Save these entries.

Check whether the article list is available in the discontinuation workbench. Hint: Do not discontinue the articles!

2006/Q2

a)

SAP menu → Logistics → Retailing → Master Data → Article Data → Article → Discontinue → Discontinuation Workbench

b)

Transaction WRF_DIS_SEL

c)

Open the F4 Help on the Article List ID field and display the article lists for your user.

d)

Copy the article list by double-clicking it. Do not discontinue, since the articles are still required for other exercises.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

269

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the possible uses of the article list • Describe the different kinds of article lists • Create your own article lists

270

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 265

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Configuring the Article Master Lesson Duration: 60 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this lesson, you learn how you can configure the article master according to user/specific requirements.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences

There are no instructor notes in this lesson.

Business Example You are going to include a new article in your assortment and maintain the data that is required to be able to use the article in the supply chain. The employees who work with the article master in different areas should only be able to process the data that is relevant to them. Your stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any new articles that are being added to their assortment. Due to a particular article’s poor sales figures, you decide to remove it from your store’s assortment.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

271

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Technical Structure of the Article Master

Figure 111: Structuring the Article Master

In the article maintenance, you can maintain all views relevant to the article maintenance in the correct sequence. The data screens that correspond to the individual views are also sub-divided into several subscreens. The subscreens group together several data fields according to different data maintenance aspects.

272

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Figure 112: Article Master - Screen Sequence

User-specific dialogs for article master maintenance allow you to save data from various views in a compressed format on as few screens as possible. They also allow you to integrate your own fields, create user-specific dialogs, and transfer data more quickly. The maintenance dialog for the article master is controlled by a screen sequence that contains a selection of data screens. The logical screen contains the field groups required for the dialog (subscreen). Influencing factors: Here you can determine for example which standard screen sequence is called up for certain transactions or users.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

273

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Configure the Article Master

Figure 113: Article Master Configuration Procedure

When creating your own data screens, you should use the available Retail subscreens. Own subscreens are necessary if alternative field groupings or new fields are required. To create your own subscreens, copy the standard program into your own function group (see IMG instructions). Then create the desired subscreens in the new function group. You can only integrate fields from your own tables and subscreen containers into the existing program by using modifying functions. For more specifc details on how to create a customized article master, see Notes 38229 and 44410 on SAP Service Marketplace.

Figure 114: Assign Screen Sequences to the Influencing Factors

274

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

You can assign a screen sequence to a combination of one or more transactions, users, article types or industries. The screen sequence then appears automatically if the users in question select this transaction, article type or industry. For this, you have to create groups of transactions, users, article types or industries, by assigning them to a transaction, user, article type or industry reference according to your requirements. The screen reference number can be freely assigned. To add new users when assigning users to a user screen reference, choose New Entries. •

Screen reference “Transaction”: This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, during the article master record maintenance based on the transaction code. The values that are valid for this screen reference are fixed and cannot be set by the user.

•

Screen reference “User”: This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, when article master records are maintained based on the user. Users are automatically divided into groups when the same screen reference is assigned.

•

Screen reference “Article Type”: This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, when article master records are maintained based on the article type.

•

Screen reference “Industry”: This controls which screens are displayed, and in what sequence, when article master records are maintained based on the industry. For SAP Retail, you select “*” as the industry.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

275

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

References

Figure 115: Controlling the field selection

To determine whether a field is supressed or displayed in the article maintenance, or whether entering a field value is mandatory or optional (in other words, whether it is a required entry or an optional entry field), the field must be assigned to a field selection group. You can assign each field to only one field selection group. You can maintain several field references for each field selection group. For each combination of field reference and field selection group you determine whether the fields should be suppressed, displayed, must be maintained or can be maintained. You can then assign these field references to the article types in the article type maintenance. Each article type is then assigned exactly one field reference.

276

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Figure 116: Controlling the Reference Handling

In the detail view of the Customizing transaction Assign Fields to Field Selection Groups, you control the reference behavior of the individual fields. When you create an article master record with reference, the field content is copied from the reference article as default value, but only in case the Propose field cont. indicator is set. By means of the field attributes, you can determine whether changes to the reference should affect master records that were created with this reference. If you have set the Propose field cont. indicator, so that the field content is proposed from the reference, you can also set the Copy field content indicator. The field content is then also copied as follows every time the reference is changed: • • •

From the generic article to the variants From the reference site to the dependent sites From client level to the lower validity areas of the article

If you have set the Propose field cont. indicator, by setting the Incl.initial values indicator, you can determine that the field content will also be copied when the reference field contains its initial value. To restrict the article types for which the field content is proposed, set the Restrict artl cat. field accordingly.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

277

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 117: General Control - Reference Sites

In the general control for Retail master data, you define parameters that are important for different SAP Retail subfunctions on a client-wide basis. Reference sites provide specific logistics data when creating or changing article data. This logistical data relates, for example, to data for requirements planning, forecasting and warehouse management. This minimizes the time and effort involved in entering data. Changes to the reference articles can automatically be integrated into the relevant data records. Here you specify a distribution center that is used as reference for copying distribution centers-relevant article data, and you specify a store that is used as reference for copy functions for store-relevant article data. You can use the setting Distribution Chain Control to maintain a reference site for each distribution chain. You can only create reference sites for store distribution chains. Furthermore, none of the stores entered here can be the same as the reference store in the general Retail Master Data control.

278

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

273

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Exercise 19: Configuring the Article Master Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Make and define user-specific article master settings (swapping and hiding subscreens) • Assign these article master settings to a user

Business Example You want to reduce your employees’ workload as far as possible and therefore, in the article master, you want only the fields that they need to process to be displayed in the right sequence. Also, you want to change the sequence in which the article master views appear.

Task 1: You want to configure a customized article master view for your employees. 1.

In the article maintenance, display the basic data for article R1TA12##. Use the technical help of the screen data to make a note of the program name and the screen numbers of the “General Data” and “Validities” screen modules. Program name: ______________________________________________ “General Data” Screen Number: _____________________________________ “Validities” Screen Number : __________________________________________

2.

You want to configure your own article master view for your employees. Open a second session in the Customizing by choosing Logistics - General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Define Structure of Data Screens for Each Screen Sequence Create your own screen sequence on the basis of the “Retail Fashion Tab Pages” screen sequence. Your screen sequence receives the number Z, where is the letter that belongs to your group number (see the conversion table); for example, Group 06 copies screen sequence 33 to ZI, and maintains the description “Retail Standard Gr##”. Copy the screen sequence with all dependent entries. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

279

Unit 6: Single Articles

3.

IRT310

What is a screen sequence? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

4.

Compare the subscreens of data screens 08 (Logistics:DC) and 09 (Logistics: Store) Can you assign subscreens and the screens belonging to them to several data screens? Justify your answer. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

5.

Examine the subscreens for data screen 04 (Basic data). What subscreens are there behind screens 2002 and 2004? 2002: ____________________________ 2004: ____________________________

6.

Swap the subscreens 2002 and 2004 by changing the screen numbers.

7.

With which screen number can you hide a subscreen? ______________________________________________________

8.

Hide the “Care Code” subscreen in the Basic Data view and have a look at the new data screen.

Task 2: You now wish to assign the changed article master to your user in the system: 1.

Enter a 2-character screen reference for your user (for example, your initials) under Assign Screen Sequences to User/Article Type/Transaction/Industry Sector on the Screen Reference level.

2.

Now select dialog structure Screen sequence control and add a new entry by assigning your screen reference (see 1.) and the number of your screen sequence (see the previous exercise under 2.) to transaction 03. Select “*” as the screen reference of the article type and the industry sector.

3.

You now want to change the sequence of the main screens so that the Logistics: Store and the Logistics: Distribution Center views appear immediately after the Basic Data view. Save the entries you have made.

4.

Now check your settings in the article maintenance.

Continued on next page

280

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Firstly, check that the defaulted views appear in the sequence that has just been set. Afterwards, go to the Basic Data view for article R1TA12## and check that the Validities data screen now appears before the General Data screen and that the Care Code data screen is supressed. 5.

2006/Q2

Please delete the user link to your own screen sequence.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

281

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Solution 19: Configuring the Article Master Task 1: You want to configure a customized article master view for your employees. 1.

In the article maintenance, display the basic data for article R1TA12##. Use the technical help of the screen data to make a note of the program name and the screen numbers of the “General Data” and “Validities” screen modules. Program name: ______________________________________________ “General Data” Screen Number: _____________________________________ “Validities” Screen Number : __________________________________________

2.

a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Display

b)

Select the Basic data view

c)

Click on a field in the relevant screen module (“General Data” or “Validities”) in the Basic data view of the article, and choose F1 Help

d)

Choose Technical Information Program Name:

SAPLMGD2

Screen Number “General Data”:

2002

Screen Number “Validities”:

2004

You want to configure your own article master view for your employees. Open a second session in the Customizing by choosing Logistics - General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Define Structure of Data Screens for Each Screen Sequence Create your own screen sequence on the basis of the “Retail Fashion Tab Pages” screen sequence. Your screen sequence receives the number Z, where is the letter that belongs to your group number (see the conversion table); for example, Group 06 copies screen sequence 33 to ZI, and maintains the description “Retail Standard Gr##”.

Continued on next page

282

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

Copy the screen sequence with all dependent entries.

3.

a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Define Structure of Data Screens for Each Screen Sequence

b)

Select screen sequence 33 and choose Copy As...

c)

Assign a number and description Number

Z, where is the letter that belongs to your group number (see the conversion table); for example, Group 06 copies the screen sequence 33 to ZI.

Description

Retail Standard Gr##

d)

Choose Enter

e)

A dialog box appears. Confirm it by choosing Enter.

What is a screen sequence? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

4.

Use the F1 Help on the screen sequence number to find the information you need

Compare the subscreens of data screens 08 (Logistics:DC) and 09 (Logistics: Store) Can you assign subscreens and the screens belonging to them to several data screens? Justify your answer. ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

Select screen 08 or 09 → Subscreen Data screen 08 contains the distribution center of the distribution center and data screen 09 contains the logistics view of the store. They partly contain some of the same subscreens. That means that the subscreens appear in several data screens, together with their program.

5.

Examine the subscreens for data screen 04 (Basic data). What subscreens are there behind screens 2002 and 2004? 2002: ____________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

283

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

2004: ____________________________

6.

a)

Select screen 04 → View subscreen.

b)

Select each subscreen and choose View subscreen. General Data

2004:

Validities

Swap the subscreens 2002 and 2004 by changing the screen numbers. a)

7.

2002:

Overwrite screen number 2002 with 2004, and vice versa.

With which screen number can you hide a subscreen? ______________________________________________________ a)

8.

To hide a subscreen, you have to overwrite the screen number with 0001.

Hide the “Care Code” subscreen in the Basic Data view and have a look at the new data screen. a)

Overwrite screen number 3001 with screen number 0001.

b)

Save

c)

Select the row that was changed

d)

Choose View data screen

Task 2: You now wish to assign the changed article master to your user in the system: 1.

Enter a 2-character screen reference for your user (for example, your initials) under Assign Screen Sequences to User/Article Type/Transaction/Industry Sector on the Screen Reference level. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Assign Screen Sequences to User/Article Type/Transaction/Industry Sector.

b)

Choose dialog structure User screen reference.

c)

Choose New Entries

d)

Enter a 2-character screen reference for your user (for example, your initials).

e)

Table View → Save Continued on next page

284

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Configuring the Article Master

2.

3.

Now select dialog structure Screen sequence control and add a new entry by assigning your screen reference (see 1.) and the number of your screen sequence (see the previous exercise under 2.) to transaction 03. Select “*” as the screen reference of the article type and the industry sector. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Assign Screen Sequences to User/Article Type/Transaction/Industry Sector.

b)

Dialog structure Screen sequence control

c)

Make the relevant entries

d)

Table View → Save

You now want to change the sequence of the main screens so that the Logistics: Store and the Logistics: Distribution Center views appear immediately after the Basic Data view. Save the entries you have made.

4.

a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Maintain Order of Main and Additional Screens.

b)

Select your screen order.

c)

Choose Details

d)

Enter sequence number 11 for Logistics: Store and sequence 12 for Logistics: Distribution Center.

e)

Choose Enter

f)

Choose Sort Main Screens

g)

Table View → Save

Now check your settings in the article maintenance. Firstly, check that the defaulted views appear in the sequence that has just been set. Afterwards, go to the Basic Data view for article R1TA12## and check that the Validities data screen now appears before the General Data screen and that the Care Code data screen is supressed. a)

5.

2006/Q2

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Display

Please delete the user link to your own screen sequence. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Material Master → Configuring the Material Master → Assign Screen Sequences to User/Article Type/Transaction/Industry Sector.

b)

Select the row that contains your user entry

c)

Edit → Delete

d)

Table View → Save

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

285

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs • Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences

286

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 280

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Article Discontinuation Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of its life cycle Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in article discontinuation

The article number can be used again after the archiving that follows the discontinuation.

Business Example You are going to include a new article in your assortment and maintain the data that is required to be able to use the article in the supply chain. The employees who work with the article master in different areas should only be able to process the data that is relevant to them. Your stores are regularly informed about changes to existing articles and any new articles that are being added to your assortment. Due to a particular article’s poor sales figures, you decide to remove it from your store’s assortment.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

287

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Reasons for and Types of Article Discontinuation

Figure 118: Reasons for Discontinuation

In certain cases, you may decide that you no longer want to carry a particular article; for example, if the vendor no longer carries the article, because there are less expensive alternatives, or because the article is out-of-date. You can remove the article by deleting the article listing conditions or by discontinuing the article. •

Deleting the article listing conditions If you delete an article assignment to an assortment owner, then the listing conditions that belong to it are also deleted. The article master record remains and there may still be stock available, but no further orders can be placed for the article. However, you may still be able to sell it.

•

Discontinue article The consequences of discontinuing an article are greater than the consequences of deleting listing conditions. When an article is discontinued, the article master record is deleted from the database along with all the article data that belongs to it, including purchasing info records and listing conditions.

288

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Figure 119: Types of Article Discontinuation

The following types of article discontinuation are available in the system: •

Article Discontinuation for the vendor: Certain vendors can no longer supply the article for any of the company’s sites.

•

Article Discontinuation for the Assortment: The article can no longer be procured internally or externally for particular assortments (sites) and can no longer be sold.

•

Article Discontinuation for the Distribution Chain: The article can no longer be carried and sold in any assortments in a certain distribution chain .

•

Client-Wide Article Discontinuation: If an article is to be discontinued from all assortments, it can be discontinued on a client-wide basis. The article can no longer be used in any operative business processes.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

289

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Discontinuation Process

Figure 120: Stages in the Discontinuation Process

•

Ordering block date: The date from which a site can no longer order an article from a vendor. The delivery date of the purchase order document must be before this block date. You need to provide this date for all types of article discontinuation.

•

Sales block date: The date from which an article is no longer allowed to be sold in a site. Specify this date for the article discontinuation for the assortment and for the distribution chain.

290

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Figure 121: Article Discontinuation Process

Steps in discontinuation: •

• •

•

• •

2006/Q2

You decide to discontinue an article on a particular date (ordering block date, sales block date) and start preparing for the discontinuation process. One way of reducing the stock you have in storage more quickly is to run a promotion. After this, the article discontinuation is triggered for a particular day. If the article is, for example, still in stock, in a stock allocation, an arrangement or a purchase order, then you cannot discontinue the article. You must change this data to eliminate the error messages. In certain cases, the system automatically defaults a solution, for example, transfer posting the stock to value-only articles. You can implement these automatic follow-up actions or you may decide to let the responsible users process the problems manually. If there are problems that could not or cannot be solved automatically, the users responsible receive detailed messages in their integrated inboxes. If all the necessary changes have been made and the sales blocking time has arrived, then the article is first deleted logically, and then, at a previously defined point in time, deleted physically from the database.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

291

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Figure 122: Subsequent Processing in Article Discontinuation

SAP delivers a range of standard subsequent processing procedures. These procedures are used to resolve errors that occur during article discontinuation. Customers can, however, define additional procedures and link them up with the error messages using the assignment table in the subsequent processing procedures. At present, the following subsequent processing procedures are available: • • • • • • • • •

AK: Delete material from promotion AM: Delete material from product catalog EB: Reset source list entries IF: Delete information records for supplying plants IS: Delete information records LK: Reset listing conditions QB: Reset quota arrangement VM: Transfer posting to value-only article VK: Reset selling period

Subsequent processing procedures are assigned to the possible error messages. One subsequent processing procedure can be defined as the standard procedure for each error message. The processor group is an object from the HR organization model.

292

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

287

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Exercise 20: Article Discontinuation Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Explain the differences between the simplified and the complete checks for article discontinuation • Flag an article for logical and physical discontinuation • Trigger an automatic follow-up procedure • Find and solve a problem resulting from the discontinuation process that you have been allocated as processor.

Business Example You have decided that the articles R1TA50## and R1TA51## should no longer be carried in the store RT##. To avoid further orders being placed for these articles in the store, you discontinue the article in assortment RT##.

Task 1: 1.

Execute the discontinuation for an assortment. Select the correct menu path for this.

2.

You want to discontinue article R1TA50## and article R1TA51##(using the multiple selection function) for your assortment RT##.

3.

For performance reasons, you first select the simplified check. If only one problem per article occurs during the discontinuation check, the system can execute the relevant follow-up action immediately and set the deletion flag right away. The result should be given immediately. If you wish, you can use the test mode before performing the actual check.

4.

Which result provides the simplified check for the discontinuation of both articles? R1TA50##: ______________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ R1TA51##: ______________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

293

Unit 6: Single Articles

5.

IRT310

Why is it not possible to discontinue article R1TA50## straight away? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________

Task 2: As you cannot use the simplified check to discontinue article R1TA50##, you use the complete check instead. 1.

Discontinue article R1TA50## with the complete check. Select the correct menu path for this.

2.

Check the article R1TA50## for the assortment RT##. Deactivate the offline checks to receive the discontinuation log directly. Hint: If you forget to deactivate the Offline checks, you can view the result by choosing Discontinue → Worklist.

3.

Perform the follow-up actions defaulted by the system and then check the article again (choose Edit → Check article again). Which error message cannot be processed automatically? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________

4.

Discontinue your article now.

Task 3: View the discontinuation status of articles R1TA50## and R1TA51##. 1.

Which flag is set for your assortment RT##? R1TA50##______________________________________________________ R1TA51##______________________________________________________

Task 4: You now use the work item to continue the discontinuation process. 1.

Go to your inbox and process the unsolved error by deleting the order item there. Hint: The work item appears in the inbox a few minutes after saving. Ensure that you only process the work item for your store RT##. Continued on next page

294

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Task 5: Finally, check the discontinuation status of your article R1TA50## again. 1.

What status has the article for your assortment RT## now? ______________________________________________________

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

295

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Solution 20: Article Discontinuation Task 1: 1.

Execute the discontinuation for an assortment. Select the correct menu path for this. a)

2.

Retailing: Master Data → Material Data → Material→ Discontinue → Assortment

You want to discontinue article R1TA50## and article R1TA51##(using the multiple selection function) for your assortment RT##. a)

3.

Assortment

RT##

Article

by means of multiple selection (arrow after the article field): R1TA50## and R1TA51##.

For performance reasons, you first select the simplified check. If only one problem per article occurs during the discontinuation check, the system can execute the relevant follow-up action immediately and set the deletion flag right away. The result should be given immediately. If you wish, you can use the test mode before performing the actual check. a)

Simplified check Remove the check for test mode and do not make any changes to any other checkboxes.

4.

Which result provides the simplified check for the discontinuation of both articles? R1TA50##: ______________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ R1TA51##: ______________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a)

Results R1TA50##: red traffic light; the deletion indicator is not set. R1TA51##: green traffic light; the deletion indicator is set. Continued on next page

296

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

5.

Why is it not possible to discontinue article R1TA50## straight away? ___________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________ a)

The article cannot be discontinued as a purchase order exists.

Task 2: As you cannot use the simplified check to discontinue article R1TA50##, you use the complete check instead. 1.

Discontinue article R1TA50## with the complete check. Select the correct menu path for this. a)

2.

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Discontinue → Assortment

Check the article R1TA50## for the assortment RT##. Deactivate the offline checks to receive the discontinuation log directly. Hint: If you forget to deactivate the Offline checks, you can view the result by choosing Discontinue → Worklist. a)

b) c)

Assortment

RT##

Article

R1TA50##

Complete check Deselect the Offline checks checkbox. Hint: If you forget to deactivate the Offline checks, you can see the result by choosing Discontinue → Worklist.

3.

Perform the follow-up actions defaulted by the system and then check the article again (choose Edit → Check article again). Which error message cannot be processed automatically? ___________________________________________________________

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

297

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

___________________________________________________________ a)

Select the item

b)

Choose Follow-Up Actions

c)

Choose Enter to confirm the message.

d)

Edit → Check article again The message “Purchase order exists” could not be deleted automatically.

4.

Discontinue your article now. a)

Choose Discontinue

Task 3: View the discontinuation status of articles R1TA50## and R1TA51##. 1.

Which flag is set for your assortment RT##? R1TA50##______________________________________________________ R1TA51##______________________________________________________ a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Discontinue → Discontinuation Status

b)

Use multiple selection (arrow after the article field) to select article R1TA50## and article R1TA51##.

c)

Select assortment RT##. R1TA50##: Discontinuation Process Started R1TA51##: Deletion flag set

Continued on next page

298

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Article Discontinuation

Task 4: You now use the work item to continue the discontinuation process. 1.

Go to your inbox and process the unsolved error by deleting the order item there. Hint: The work item appears in the inbox a few minutes after saving. Ensure that you only process the work item for your store RT##. a)

SAP menu → Office → Work Center Hint: The work item appears in the inbox a few minutes after saving. Ensure that you only process the work item for your store RT##.

b)

In the Business Workplace choose Inbox → Workflow → Grouped according to task → Display Error in Discontinuation of Site Article

c)

Select work item

d)

Choose Execute

e)

Select and delete the purchase order.

f)

Message “... Execute function ...” appears. Choose “Yes to confirm it”.

g)

Purchase Order → Save

h)

Choose Update

i)

Choose F3 to go back and terminate the work item.

Task 5: Finally, check the discontinuation status of your article R1TA50## again. 1.

What status has the article for your assortment RT## now? ______________________________________________________ a)

2006/Q2

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Discontinue → Discontinuation Status Article

R1TA50##

Assortment

RT##

New Status

Deletion flag set

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

299

Unit 6: Single Articles

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of its life cycle • Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in article discontinuation

300

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Create an article master record • Name the various article categories • Explain the connection between the views of the article maintenance and the organizational units • Maintain the individual views in the article master • List the integrated mass maintenance options • Describe what the article core master data is • Explain how you can use the maintenance groups • Explain the use of the article monitor • Describe the different ways of copying the article • Name and configure the maintenance and default options of the PRICAT function • Edit a PRICAT catalog item • Post a PRICAT catalog item • Name the possible uses of the article list • Describe the different kinds of article lists • Create your own article lists • Adapt the article master record to suit your individual needs • Structure the data screens and combine them in screen sequences • Select an article for logical and physical discontinuation at the end of its life cycle • Describe the most important subsequent processing procedures in article discontinuation

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

301

Unit Summary

302

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 7 Generic Articles and Variants

297

Unit Overview This unit explains how you can create variants via characteristics on the merchandise category and via the characteristics profiles. You will learn how to create a generic article with variants, how to control the sales price maintenance for the variants, and how to maintain additionals for an article.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2006/Q2

Create characteristics Assign characteristic values to characteristics Group characteristic values together Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles List the prerequisites for creating a generic article Create a generic article with variants Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article Name the possible uses of the prepack Describe the structure of a prepack Create a prepack article for an existing generic article Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the most important parameters Assign additionals to an article

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

303

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Unit Contents Lesson: Characteristics ........................................................305 Exercise 21: Characteristics ..............................................313 Lesson: Creating a Generic Article ...........................................318 Exercise 22: Creating a Generic Article .................................325 Exercise 23: Pricing for Generic Articles and Variants ................335 Lesson: Prepack ................................................................339 Exercise 24: Structured Articles ..........................................343 Lesson: Additionals.............................................................348 Exercise 25: Additionals ..................................................355

304

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 299

Lesson: Characteristics

Characteristics Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview This lesson explains the role of characteristics, and tells you how they are created and what attributes they can have.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •

Create characteristics Assign characteristic values to characteristics Group characteristic values together Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category

There are no instructor notes in this lesson.

Business Example You add the area Sport to your textiles assortment. You carry the sports textiles in different colors and sizes. You should be able to assign the different colors and sizes to the different articles as simply and efficiently as possible.

Creating Characteristics Characteristics refer to attributes of an object, such as the color of a blouse, the size of a T-shirt or the flavor of a yoghurt. You create characteristics for merchandise catagories or merchandise catagory hierarchy levels. Within a grouping, the values of the characteristics are passed on from one level to the next. You can copy, restrict or add the values of the superior hierarchy level in the subordinate level, depending on how the characteristic is defined.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

305

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Figure 123: Characteristic: Definition

We differentiate between: • •

Variant-creating characteristics (suitable for creating generic articles) Non-variant-creating characteristics (for display purposes only)

Characteristic Values Characteristic values are the concrete attributes of a characteristic, for example, characteristic = color, characteristic values = red, blue, yellow. Characteristics can be valued differently for each individual article, for example, an article with the characteristic Color can receive the value Red, while another article can receive the value Blue. Characteristic values can be created with two different transactions.

306

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Characteristics

Figure 124: Characteristic Values: Options during the Creation

Use the characteristic maintenance (transaction CT04) to create a characteristic. If you want to use the new characteristic value storage, you have to assign a function module in the characteristics maintenance, which is used to carry out the value check. The name of the function module delivered by SAP is WRF_CHECK_CHAR_VAL. After you save the new characteristic, you can navigate to the new maintenance transaction (WRFCHVAL), to create the characteristic values for this characteristic. You can only navigate to the new transaction in for characteristics that use the function module named above as value check. The new characteristic value maintenance is also only possible for character format (CHAR) characteristics, and when the maximum number of characters is 18.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

307

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Figure 125: How to proceed when using the new characteristic value storage

In addition to the actual characteristic values, up to ten customer-specific values can be maintained via the maintenance dialog (for example, for colors, an internal color code can be converted into a pantone color code, and so on). The characteristic values maintained in this way, and the characteristic values created directly for the characteristic by means of transaction CT04, are stored in different tables. The use of color and size characteristics in operative processes (for example, in the markdown planning, in the operative planning, in BW) is supported. • • •

Characteristic typing direct/high-performance access to color and size information by means of the article basic data (table MARA) Color and size information updated to the BW

Characteristic typing is used to assign the information to a characteristic (which can have any value and description), information about whether a color, a main size or an additional size is concerned. This information is required as a control in operative processes (for example, price planning workbench). The characteristics values of a typed characteristic are also stored redundantly in table MARA for each variant of a generic article, so that the operative processes can perform better when accessing variants of a special color or size. The characteristic is typed as a color characteristic, size characteristic (main size) or size characteristic (second size) in the new characteristic value maintenance. You also have the option of selecting Not typed for characteristics that do not fit into a color or size schema, but for which you still want to use the new value storage.

308

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Characteristics

Furthermore you define the check option, which has an effect during the article maintenance, is also defined. You can use this to control whether additional characteristic values, which were not defined in the new characteristic value storage and therefore are only valid for this article, can be created spontaneously during the article maintenance. In addition to the characteristic value that is a maximum of 18 characters long, language-dependent descriptions can also be created (a maximum of 10).

Figure 126: Characteristic Value Maintenance

If additional columns were defined in Customizing for the characteristic type in question (for example, analyzing color, pantone color), values can also be created for the characteristic type. The values in the additional columns can be interpreted as an alternative identification of the characteristic values. There can be an improved selection of the relevant internal characteristic values within the framework of the search help. In the case of color and size characteristics, as a rule, a large number of characteristic values is concerned (for example, several thousand color values, which are subject to constant seasonal enhancements), where, in the case of individual generic articles, only a very limited section from the characteristic value spectrum is required (for example, 20 colors and 20 sizes). This spectrum of relevant characteristic values can vary from one generic article to the next. Against this background, it is important that the available characteristic values can be logically bundled into groupings defined by the customer. This means that you can quickly compile the characteristics relevant to you, by navigating through the individual groupings.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

309

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Figure 127: Characteristic Value Groups

After the characteristic values are saved, you can group the existing characteristic values application-specifically in form of a hierarchy. The first time the maintenance of the characteristic value groupings is called, only the root node of the hierarchy that represents the characteristic exists. The left-hand screen area displays the hierarchy tree that lists the created characteristic value groups. Characteristic values can be assigned to the individual hierarchy nodes at every level (screen area on the bottom right: characteristic values assignment), so that the characteristic values can be bundled and distributed correctly for the user. Characteristic value can be assigned to any number of hierarchy nodes. The possible use of a hierarchy node can also be restricted to a fixed number of merchandise categories (upper right screen area: merchandise category restriction). This means that, in the article maintenance, this node is not displayed in the characteristic values search help, if the existing article does not belong to one of the specified merchandise categories within the restriction list. If there are no restrictions, the node is available to all merchandise categories. The hierarchical characteristic value grouping defined in this way is then available during the article maintenance when the search help is used to select the characteristic values. For improved orientation, the individually defined additional columns (for example, analyzing color, pantone color) are also available in this maintenance and in the characteristic values search help. You can also use transaction WRFCHVALTYPE to type characteristics. Generally, this only concerns characteristics that do not use the new value storage characteristic values. The other characteristics are typed directly in the new maintenance of the characteristic values.

310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Characteristics

The check option cannot be maintained in such characteristics. Here, in the characteristic maintenance (CT04) in the Values tab, the Additional Values indicator must be set if you want to be able to create characteristic values in the article maintenance on an ad-hoc basis. If a categorization is carried out subsequently and variants already exist, which use this characteristic, there is a report you can use to redundantly store the color and size information in table MARA.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

311

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

312

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

IRT310

2006/Q2

IRT310

307

Lesson: Characteristics

Exercise 21: Characteristics Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a characteristic for which the new characteristic value storage can be used. Values are maintained for this characteristic, and are then grouped together into characteristic value groups.

Business Example In companies that work with a lot of generic articles and a large number of variants for each generic article, it is important that the maintenance of the characteristic values and the selection of these values for the article creation is as user-friendly as possible.

Task 1: 1.

To be able to use the characteristic value creation for a characteristic, the characteristic must be created in the format _____________. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence.

Task 2:

1.

If you group characteristic values together ... Choose the correct answer(s).

□

A

□

B

□

C

□

D

... a characteristic value can be assigned to a characteristic value group ... a characteristic value can be assigned to several characteristic value groups ... a characteristic value must be assigned to more than one characteristic value group ... a characteristic value can be assigned to no characteristic value group

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

313

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Task 3: You want to add textiles to your assortment, and so created a new merchandise category hierarchy level “Apparel”, and created the merchandise category “Sportswear” under this hierarchy level. In the merchandise category “Sportswear”, generic articles are created with the characteristics Color and Size. You want to use the new characteristic values maintenance for these characteristics. 1.

Create a new characteristic Color##.

2.

Use the maintenance transaction to maintain the characteristic values, and also enter a customer-specific value in the Analyzing Color column. Maintain the following as characteristic values:

314

Char. Value

Description

Analyzing Color

1

white

white

11

snow white

white

12

wool

white

13

beige

white

2

yellow

yellow

21

sunflower

yellow

22

orange

orange

23

apricot

orange

24

peach

orange

3

red

red

31

coral

red

32

bordeaux

red

8

black

black

3.

The various color characteristic values are likely not to be relevant for all articles, but can be restricted to certain values depending on the season. Maintain two characteristic values groups and divide the values among both seasons. The basic colors black and white are included in both groups.

4.

Create a characteristic profile MP## with the new characteristic Color## and the existing characteristic Size.

5.

Assign the characteristics profile to merchandise category RF1T0## Sweat-Shirts GR##.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Characteristics

Solution 21: Characteristics Task 1: 1.

To be able to use the characteristic value creation for a characteristic, the characteristic must be created in the format _____________. Fill in the blanks to complete the sentence. a)

Character (CHAR) format

Task 2: 1.

If you group characteristic values together ... Answer: A, B, D

Task 3: You want to add textiles to your assortment, and so created a new merchandise category hierarchy level “Apparel”, and created the merchandise category “Sportswear” under this hierarchy level. In the merchandise category “Sportswear”, generic articles are created with the characteristics Color and Size. You want to use the new characteristic values maintenance for these characteristics. 1.

Create a new characteristic Color##. a)

2.

Use the transaction CT04 to create the characteristic (Data Type: CHAR, Number of Chars: 10) and on the Values tab maintain the check via the function module WRF_CHECK_CHAR_VAL.

Use the maintenance transaction to maintain the characteristic values, and also enter a customer-specific value in the Analyzing Color column. Maintain the following as characteristic values: Char. Value

Description

Analyzing Color

1

white

white

11

snow white

white

12

wool

white

13

beige

white

2

yellow

yellow Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

315

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

21

sunflower

yellow

22

orange

orange

23

apricot

orange

24

peach

orange

3

red

red

31

coral

red

32

bordeaux

red

8

black

black

a) 3.

In transaction CLWE, create a characteristics profile, maintain a description and use the Characteristics tab to assign the two characteristics. The Relevancy Indicator is 2.

Assign the characteristics profile to merchandise category RF1T0## Sweat-Shirts GR##. a)

316

Use transaction WRFCHVALGRP to group together the characteristic values. Under your characteristic Color##, maintain the groups Spring/Summer and Autumn/Winter.

Create a characteristic profile MP## with the new characteristic Color## and the existing characteristic Size. a)

5.

Use transaction WRFCHVAL to create characteristic values.

The various color characteristic values are likely not to be relevant for all articles, but can be restricted to certain values depending on the season. Maintain two characteristic values groups and divide the values among both seasons. The basic colors black and white are included in both groups. a)

4.

IRT310

Assign the profile to the merchandise category in transaction WG22. Maintain the profile and then choose Create.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Characteristics

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create characteristics • Assign characteristic values to characteristics • Group characteristic values together • Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

317

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

Lesson: 312

IRT310

Creating a Generic Article Lesson Duration: 120 Minutes

Lesson Overview This lesson shows you how to create generic articles and variants.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •

Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles List the prerequisites for creating a generic article Create a generic article with variants Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article

There are no instructor notes in this lesson.

Business Example Your vendor is offering a new T-shirt for the new season in various colors and sizes.

The Structure of a Generic Article with Variants Variants are articles that only differ from one another in certain characteristics values (for example, color, size or flavor). They are compiled under one generic article. Using generic articles makes it easier to maintain variants, as the data that is valid for all variants only needs to be entered once for the generic article.

318

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Figure 128: Generic Articles/Variants: Definition

Generic articles can be used in all areas of retail in which articles only differ in certain characteristics values.

Figure 129: Generic Articles: Examples

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

319

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Creating Variants for a Generic Article

Figure 130: Generic Articles: Creating Variants

Generic articles are created with the article category 01 Generic article. To be able to create a generic article in a merchandise category, there must be at least one variant-creating characteristic in the merchandise category. In order to flag a characteristic as Relevant to variants you use the Relevancy Indicator when assigning the characteristic to the merchandise category or to the characteristics profile. The relevancy indicator must be set to 2, to be able to use this characteristic to create variants of a generic article. Several characteristic profiles can be assigned to one merchandise category. When you create an article in the merchandise category in question, you can select one of the assigned characteristic profiles. The characteristics of the characteristic profile determines the possible variants (matrix/list) for the generic article. Otherwise the variants are created when you use the merchandise category characteristics to create a generic article. A generic article matrix is formed from the variant-creating characteristics. You can select the variants that are to be created by simply selecting the relevant checkboxes. If you have three characteristics, one is fixed and the two unfixed characteristics form the matrix. If you have more than three characteristics, the possible variants are displayed in a list.

320

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Figure 131: Generic Articles: Number Assignment for Variants

In SAP Retail, the generic article variants are usually numbered based on the generic article’s number with internal number assignment in form of a sequential three-digit suffix. You can use a user exit to compose the article numbers of the variants, for example, from: • • •

The generic article number The first 2 digits of the characteristic Color. The size

Figure 132: Generic Articles: Variant Listing

With variant listing, the system checks if exactly the same variant does not already exist as part of a generic article in the module.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

321

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Generic Article Pricing

Figure 133: Generic Articles: Pricing Control (1)

Influencing Factors in the Pricing Control Generic article variants can either automatically inherit a sales price from the generic article or have their own separate sales price. The sales price calculation for variants is controlled by means of a pricing profile and a pricing reference article. The pricing profile in the article master record (Basic Data) of the generic article can have the following attributes: • • •

0 = Variants priceable differently; do not propose GArticle as ref. 1 = Variants priceable differently; propose GArticle as ref. 2 = All variants have the sales price of the generic article

The pricing profiles are preset and cannot be changed. The pricing reference article field contains the article number of the article from which the variants receive their price. • • •

If the pricing reference article field contains the generic article number, then the variant has the price that was inherited from the generic article. If the pricing reference article field is empty or contains the variant’s own article number, then a separate price has to be calculated for the variant. If the field contains the article number of another variant, then the variant has the price of the variant that was entered.

In the Sales view, choose Variant Prices to maintain the pricing reference article for each variant.

322

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Figure 134: Generic Articles: Calculation Controls (2)

For each variant, the field for the pricing reference article contains either the generic article number (then the variant inherits the generic article price), or the variant’s own article number (then a separate price is calculated for the variant), or the article number of another variant, if the variant is to have the same price. If the field for the pricing reference article remains empty, then the result is the same as entering the variant’s own article number.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

323

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

324

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

IRT310

2006/Q2

IRT310

317

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Exercise 22: Creating a Generic Article Exercise Duration: 30 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a generic article with variants

Business Example Your current summer collection contains a new dress in different colors, for which you now want to create the master record in the system.

Task 1: Now create the dress as a generic article in the system. 1.

Create the summer dress as a generic article with the views Basic Data, Listing, Purchasing and Sales. The article number A2## should be assigned to the article. It belongs to the article type Fashion and to the merchandise category RF12124. The article is delivered in the purchasing organization R300 by the vendor RF1304. You now want to create the article for the distribution channel RG10/R1.

2.

Use the characteristic profile RFP02 to create the generic article variants.

3.

The dress is offered is the colors beige and blue and in the sizes 10-16. Select the relevant colors under Basics and assign the sizes to the article.

4.

The dress is offered in the following color-size combinations: 10

12

beige

X

X

blue

X

X

14

16 X

X

5.

Go to the basic data view of the article. The article receives the description Summer dress Gr. ##.

6.

All generic article variants have the unit of measure each. Let the system determine the instore EANs for the variants.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

325

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Task 2: You now determine in which assortments your dress should be included. You use the listing procedure, which checks merchandise categories and assortment grades, to list in stores and distribution centers. 1.

Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants. The article is carried in the stores from the 1st of the following month until the end of the current year.

2.

Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments.

Task 3: Maintain the purchasing data for your vendor RF1304 in the Purchasing tab. 1.

The purchasing group 001 is responsible for the vendor.

2.

The planned delivery time is 20 days.

3.

You have agreed on a purchasing price of 43 USD for each dress. However, all the variants of size 10 are going to be delivered at a price of 40 USD for each piece.

Task 4: In the Sales tab, maintain sales data for the distribution chain RG10/R1. 1.

The variants of the color beige are not to be sold until one month from today. Maintain the corresponding point in time for these variants (For sale from).

2.

You sell the dress in distribution chain R10/R1 for a price of 199 USD each.

3.

Save the article data.

Task 5: Your vendor offers you men’s trousers, which have color, size and waist size variants. Create this article in the merchandise category Bus. Cas. Trousers (RF13121). 1.

Create the Basic Data for a generic article A3## in the merchandise category RF13121 with the article type Fashion.

2.

The characteristics can be determined from the characteristics profile MENSPANTS. There are the following pants combinations: Für waist 32:

Continued on next page

326

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Khaki

Navy

Length 33

X

X

Length 34

X

X

Khaki

Navy

Length 33

X

X

Length 34

X

X

For waist 34:

2006/Q2

3.

Display all the variants in the list display.

4.

Do not save the article data.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

327

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Solution 22: Creating a Generic Article Task 1: Now create the dress as a generic article in the system. 1.

Create the summer dress as a generic article with the views Basic Data, Listing, Purchasing and Sales. The article number A2## should be assigned to the article. It belongs to the article type Fashion and to the merchandise category RF12124. The article is delivered in the purchasing organization R300 by the vendor RF1304. You now want to create the article for the distribution channel RG10/R1. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Create

b)

Select the Basic Data, Listing, Purchasing and Sales views.

c)

d) 2.

4.

A2##

Merchandise Category

RF12124

Article Type

Fashion

Article Category

Generic article

Purchasing Organization

R300

Vendor

RF1304

Sales Organization

RG10

Distribution Channel

R1

Enter

Use the characteristic profile RFP02 to create the generic article variants. a)

3.

Article Number

Double-click the characteristic profile RFP02.

The dress is offered is the colors beige and blue and in the sizes 10-16. Select the relevant colors under Basics and assign the sizes to the article. a)

Choose the F4 Help beside the Colors field.

b)

In the hierarchy, expand the Basics area.

c)

Press CTRL, select beige and blue and choose Enter.

d)

Choose the F4 Help beside the Sizes field. Select the sizes 10,12,14 and 16, and choose Enter:

The dress is offered in the following color-size combinations: Continued on next page

328

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

5.

10

12

beige

X

X

blue

X

X

16 X

X

a)

To go to the generic article matrix, choose F3.

b)

Select the combinations specified in the table.

Go to the basic data view of the article. The article receives the description Summer dress Gr. ##. a)

You can go back to the basic data view of the article by choosing F3. Article Short Text

6.

14

Summer dress Gr##

All generic article variants have the unit of measure each. Let the system determine the instore EANs for the variants. a)

In the subscreen Standard Values For Entering Variant EANs: AlternativeUnit

EA

EAN Category

IE

Select Assign EANs int.. b)

Variant-EANs button

c)

Confirm the warning message by choosing Enter.

d)

You can go back to the basic data view of the article by choosing F8.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

329

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Task 2: You now determine in which assortments your dress should be included. You use the listing procedure, which checks merchandise categories and assortment grades, to list in stores and distribution centers. 1.

Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants. The article is carried in the stores from the 1st of the following month until the end of the current year. a)

2.

Go to the Listing tab Listing Procedures

B1

Listing and Sales



Listing and Sales



Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments. a)

Choose Execute Listing

b)

Choose Assorts

Task 3: Maintain the purchasing data for your vendor RF1304 in the Purchasing tab. 1.

The purchasing group 001 is responsible for the vendor. a)

Go to the Purchasing tab. PurchasingGroup

2.

001

The planned delivery time is 20 days. a)

Go to the Purchasing tab Pl. Deliv. Time

20

Continued on next page

330

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

3.

You have agreed on a purchasing price of 43 USD for each dress. However, all the variants of size 10 are going to be delivered at a price of 40 USD for each piece. a)

Go to the Purchasing tab Net Price:

43

b)

Choose Variant Prices button

c)

For variant blue/size 10, enter 40 as the price.

d)

Copy rule Copy Changes to subsequent nodes in the column

e)

Choose Use Rule

f)

Go back using the green arrow.

Task 4: In the Sales tab, maintain sales data for the distribution chain RG10/R1. 1.

2.

The variants of the color beige are not to be sold until one month from today. Maintain the corresponding point in time for these variants (For sale from). a)

Double-click the For sale from field

b)

For the variants of the color beige, maintain a selling time one month from today.

c)

Use the green arrow to go back.

You sell the dress in distribution chain R10/R1 for a price of 199 USD each. a) Final price

199

Enter 3.

Save the article data. a)

Article → Save

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

331

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Task 5: Your vendor offers you men’s trousers, which have color, size and waist size variants. Create this article in the merchandise category Bus. Cas. Trousers (RF13121). 1.

Create the Basic Data for a generic article A3## in the merchandise category RF13121 with the article type Fashion. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Create Article Number

A3##

Article Type

Fashion Goods

Merchandise Category

RF13121

Article Category

01

Enter 2.

The characteristics can be determined from the characteristics profile MENSPANTS. There are the following pants combinations: Für waist 32: Khaki

Navy

Length 33

X

X

Length 34

X

X

For waist 34:

Continued on next page

332

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

3.

Khaki

Navy

Length 33

X

X

Length 34

X

X

a)

Double-click the MENSPANTS characteristic profile.

b)

Choose the following characteristic values:

Length

33 and 34

Color

Khaki and Navy

Choose the green arrow

d)

Fix the color and size characteristics by setting the radiobutton for Length to Y and the radiobutton for Color to X.

e)

Select the relevant combinations for waist 32.

f)

Double-click the characteristic Waist to select the value 34. Also create all combinations for waist 34.

Display all the variants in the list display. Choose Layout Mode...

Do not save the article data. a)

2006/Q2

32 and 34

c)

a) 4.

Waist

Do not save the article data.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

333

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

334

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

IRT310

2006/Q2

IRT310

327

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

Exercise 23: Pricing for Generic Articles and Variants Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Determine how you should calculate the prices of generic article variants • Calculate the prices of a generic article variant differently

Business Example Size 10 clothes are going to be sold at a lower price than the other sizes

Task: The generic article has been created for the dress and you now want to sell all variants of the size 10 dress for a lower price. 1.

To calculate separate prices for the variants, you have to select a specific pricing profile in the generic article’s Basic Data.

2.

The settings in that pricing profile ensure that the generic article is defaulted as the pricing reference article. Which pricing profile do you select? ______________________________________________________

3.

What other options are available for pricing? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

4.

In the distribution chain RG10/R1, you want to sell the dress in the variant beige, size 10 for USD 189. Call the Sales view to maintain the sales price. How can you maintain a separate sales price for this variant? ______________________________________________________

2006/Q2

5.

The other variants of size 10 should have the same price as the variant beige, size 10. What is the easiest way of doing this?

6.

Set the indicator to save the sales conditions and save the article data.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

335

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Solution 23: Pricing for Generic Articles and Variants Task: The generic article has been created for the dress and you now want to sell all variants of the size 10 dress for a lower price. 1.

To calculate separate prices for the variants, you have to select a specific pricing profile in the generic article’s Basic Data. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Material Data → Material → Change Article

A2##

Sales Organization

RG10

Distribution Channel

R1

Select the Basic Data and Sales views. 2.

The settings in that pricing profile ensure that the generic article is defaulted as the pricing reference article. Which pricing profile do you select? ______________________________________________________ a)

Go to the “Groupings” subscreen Pricing profile

3.

1

What other options are available for pricing? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

4.

F4 Help

In the distribution chain RG10/R1, you want to sell the dress in the variant beige, size 10 for USD 189. Call the Sales view to maintain the sales price. How can you maintain a separate sales price for this variant?

Continued on next page

336

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Creating a Generic Article

______________________________________________________

5.

6.

2006/Q2

a)

Sales tab

b)

Choose Variant Prices

c)

Choose Maintain Pricing Reference Article and remove the generic article as a price article for variant beige, size 10.

d)

Choose Copy

e)

For variant beige, size 10, enter 189 as the final price.

The other variants of size 10 should have the same price as the variant beige, size 10. What is the easiest way of doing this? a)

Choose Maintain Pricing Reference Article

b)

For the variants of size 10, enter the article number of the variant beige, size 10 as a Pricing Reference Article.

c)

Choose the green arrow to return to the main data screen.

Set the indicator to save the sales conditions and save the article data. a)

Set the Save Calculated Price indicator.

b)

Material → Save

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

337

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles • List the prerequisites for creating a generic article • Create a generic article with variants • Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article

338

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: 331

Lesson: Prepack

Prepack Lesson Duration: 30 Minutes

Lesson Overview A prepack is a structured article. Prepacks are mainly used in the textiles sector.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Name the possible uses of the prepack Describe the structure of a prepack Create a prepack article for an existing generic article

A prepack is a structured article. It is discussed in the Generic Article unit, because both generic articles and prepacks are mainly used in the fashion area.

Business Example Your stores always receive quantities of T-shirts and shoes in fixed ratios of colors and sizes You use prepacks to define this quantity distribution.

Using Prepacks A prepack is a quantity of variants of one or more generic articles. A prepack is purchased as an individual article. Therefore, it has its own article number, a purchase price and purchase price conditions. The components of a prepack must belong to the same merchandise category as the prepack itself. A prepack can be prepared by the retailer, the manufacturer or the vendor. Prepacks are mostly used in the textile sector or shoe area.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

339

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Figure 135: Prepack Structure

In the retail sector, prepacks are only sold in their individual components, whereas in wholesale, they are sold as complete prepacks. Prepacks allow you to order a predefined quantity of variants of a generic article. In the purchase order, you no longer have to fill the quantity fields of the variants, since these values are proposed from the prepack maintenance. Note: Example for a prepack: You created sneakers as a generic article. The sneakers are available in sizes 11, 11.5 and 12. The sneakers are always ordered with the following quantity ratios. Size 11 = 3x Size 11.5 = 5x Size12 = 3x You define a prepack, which represents the above quantity ratios. In the purchase order, you enter the article number of the prepack. If you now select the value 3 for the prepack, the sneakers are automatically ordered in the following quantities: Size 11 = 9x Size 11.5 = 15x Size 12 = 9x

340

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Prepack

Inventory is usually managed in the store on individual component level, and in the distribution center, it is managed on complete prepack level. The splitting type can be set in Customizing and the system then automatically carries out the inventory posting at the defined level (i.e. at component- or header level). Prepacks are integrated into the process of the stock allocation with the corresponding data for the generic article in question, the characteristics and the assortment planning. This means that an intelligent prepack stock allocation is possible, which helps to improve the stock turnover and to reduce markdowns. You can find more information about this on the SAP Help Portal at: help.sap.com

Maintaining Prepacks Prepacks are created with the article category Prepack. Bills of material are used to assign generic articles with their variants. You call the bills of material maintenance by selecting the Components button in the Basic Data view. Then enter a generic article. Choose Continue. The system automatically sets the variants of this generic article. You now only have to enter the required quantities.

Figure 136: Creating Prepacks

Hint: If you have created quota scales for the variant-creating characteristics of the generic article, the system can automatically determine the required quantities from the quota scales. To do this, expand the relevant generic article and the relevant characteristic in the tree structure, and select the required quota scale.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

341

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Figure 137: Use the Prepack Allocation Planning to Create a Prepack

The prepack allocation planning allows you to link several prepack articles with a generic article, and to define how these prepack articles are composed. You can determine the components of a prepack article using a matrix. You can process generic articles with up to two characteristics. The first resp. main characteristic (for example, the color) is displayed in the rows of the matrix, and the second (for example, the size) in the columns. Both characteristics are determined by the order which was defined in Customizing. You can determine the stores that are going to sell the articles concerned using assortments or allocation rules to which you assign the corresponding prepacks. You can also determine delivery phases specifically for a certain combination of store group and prepack article. You can also plan stock (putaway) to be kept in the distribution center for replenishment purposes during a season. The planned quantities for the article concerned according to main characteristic and assortment can be sent to the MAP transaction using an interface, so that you can check whether the allocated quantities match the planned quantities. The component list for a prepack article can be changed provided the Customizing settings allow this. You can create new prepacks and include them in the allocation. You can also remove lots from the allocation. The transaction for prepack allocation planning enables you to trigger the creation of the vendor purchase orders as follow-on documents for the allocation table. If you make changes to the allocation table at a later date, the purchase orders will be changed automatically to reflect these changes.

342

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

335

Lesson: Prepack

Exercise 24: Structured Articles Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a prepack

Business Example Due to an upcoming sports event, you plan to sell sneakers for men, which are delivered to you in prepack quantities.

Task 1: Create sneakers for men as a generic article. Only maintain the Basic Data view. 1.

The men’s sneakers have the article number A5## and belongs to the merchandise category for athletics RF11111. As you want to carry the article in several colors and sizes, you choose the article category generic articles. The article is a fashion article with the article type: Fashion Goods.

2.

The system determines the colors and sizes of the article from the characteristics profile RFP04.

3.

The men’s sneakers are offered in the colors black and camel and in the sizes 8.5 and 9. Create all the possible combinations of these colors and sizes.

4.

Enter Men’s sneakers Gr## as the article short text.

5.

Save your article.

Task 2: Now create a prepack with which you want to order the shoes from your vendor at a later stage. You only maintain the Basic Data view for the prepack too. 1.

The prepack has the article number LOT_## and also belongs to your merchandise category for athletics RF11111. The article is a fashion article with the article type Fashion. Ensure you select the correct article category.

2.

Your article description is Sneakers prepack Gr##.

3.

Now allocate the components to the prepack. Create the components from the generic article variants A5##. Enter a quantity for every combination. The prepack should not contain more than 20 sneakers. Let the system check this and adjust the quantities if necessary. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

343

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

4.

344

IRT310

Save your article.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Prepack

Solution 24: Structured Articles Task 1: Create sneakers for men as a generic article. Only maintain the Basic Data view. 1.

The men’s sneakers have the article number A5## and belongs to the merchandise category for athletics RF11111. As you want to carry the article in several colors and sizes, you choose the article category generic articles. The article is a fashion article with the article type: Fashion Goods. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Create

b)

Select the Basic Data view.

c) 2.

4.

A5##

Article Type

Fashion Goods

Merchandise Category

RF11111

Article Category

Generic article

Enter, confirm message(s)

The system determines the colors and sizes of the article from the characteristics profile RFP04. a)

3.

Article Number

Select characteristic profile RFP04 by double-clicking.

The men’s sneakers are offered in the colors black and camel and in the sizes 8.5 and 9. Create all the possible combinations of these colors and sizes. a)

Use the F4 Help to select the values black and camel, and the sizes 8.5 and 9 from the Characteristic Value Assignment subscreen.

b)

Confirm your entries by pressing Enter.

c)

Press F3 to go to the generic article matrix.

d)

Select all combinations.

e)

Press F8 to go back to the Basic Data view of the article.

Enter Men’s sneakers Gr## as the article short text. a) Article Short Text

5.

Men’s sneakers Gr##

Save your article. a)

Article → Save Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

345

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Task 2: Now create a prepack with which you want to order the shoes from your vendor at a later stage. You only maintain the Basic Data view for the prepack too. 1.

The prepack has the article number LOT_## and also belongs to your merchandise category for athletics RF11111. The article is a fashion article with the article type Fashion. Ensure you select the correct article category. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Create

b)

Select the Basic Data view.

c) 2.

Article Number

LOT_##

Article Type

Fashion Goods

Merchandise Category

RF11111

Article Category

Prepack

Enter

Your article description is Sneakers prepack Gr##. a) Description

3.

Now allocate the components to the prepack. Create the components from the generic article variants A5##. Enter a quantity for every combination. The prepack should not contain more than 20 sneakers. Let the system check this and adjust the quantities if necessary. a)

b) 4.

Choose Components Generic article

A5##

Target total

20 pcs

Enter the quantities for the individual components and adjust them to the target total if necessary.

Save your article. a)

346

Sneakers prepack Gr##

Article → Save

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Prepack

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the possible uses of the prepack • Describe the structure of a prepack • Create a prepack article for an existing generic article

Related Information •

2006/Q2

For more information about quota scales and prepack allocation planning, see the SAP Help for SAP for Retail at help.sap.com.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

347

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

Lesson: 339

IRT310

Additionals Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes

Lesson Overview Additionals support the presentation of an article in the sales floor. They can be used for all article categories.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the most important parameters Assign additionals to an article

Point out that additionals can be used for all article categories.

Business Example The T-shirts are to be presented on the sales floor using special labeling.

Functions of the Additionals You can assign additionals to your articles in order to support an effective presentation in sales and to support the logistics. Examples of additionals are price tickets, security tickets, coat hangers and packing materials (particularly for private labels). You can use this function to, for example, arrange for the vendor to put price tickets on the goods you order. Other services provided by the vendor, such as the ironing or prepacking of the goods, can also be treated as additionals.

348

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Additionals

Figure 138: Additionals: Definition

Additionals are single articles that are created in a specific article type. Additionals are assigned to individual articles during the article maintenance. Procedures are defined for additionals articles. These procedures control at which events (for example, create purchase order) the system should create data for the additionals article, how that data is determined and how/where to provide it. The data for the additionals is provided in IDoc (Intermediate Document) form. To prepare additionals IDocs for printing, you require an external program that converts the data into the relevant printer format.

Figure 139: Additionals: Functions

Information about listed articles can be transferred by means of assortment list IDocs. If additionals are assigned to an article, and the assortment list indicator is set for the procedure for additionals, the information about these additionals is copied into the assortment list IDoc.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

349

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

You can include material and handling costs of the additionals in the pricing of an article. So for example, you have the option of increasing the retail price by the cost of the sew-in labels, or to include the costs for attaching price tickets in the distribution center in the price calculation of the assigned article. The Additionals monitor provides an overview of the additionals documents that have been generated by follow-up actions and their status’. Changes made to master or movement data, for example, to an article or a retail price, lead to change pointers being updated. You can use the change analysis to trigger the generation of additionals IDocs in the SAP system. If the triggering event occurs, for example, when creating a purchase order, the system automatically determines the relevant additionals and processes the data of these additionals. If necessary, you can also manually trigger the generation of additionals IDocs. The following are examples of cases in which you can use this option: • •

You need a replacement for additionals that are lost or that can no longer be used. You want to centrally print posters or stoppers as part of a promotion.

Settings for Additionals

Figure 140: Additionals: General Controls

In the general control for Retail master data, you define parameters that are important for different subfunctions in SAP Retail on client level.

350

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Additionals

In this Customizing view, you can activate the Additionals component. Hint: If you do not want to generate any additionals, you should not set the indicator, in order to improve the performance of the system.

Figure 141: Additionals: Merchandise Category Control

You must create an article master for an additional. To this master record, you have to assign an article type provided for additionals. The article type VKHM is provided for this in the standard delivery. Before you create an article master for an additional, you should define a suitable merchandise category structure for the additionals. For the additionals merchandise categories, you have to maintain the procedures for additionals that are allowed in Customizing. You determine the contents of the additionals IDoc with the logical message type. When choosing the merchandise categories, you should be aware of the fact that the same additionals IDoc is used for all the additionals in one merchandise category, due to the Customizing settings. For each merchandise category, you can enter a procedure for additionals that is automatically defaulted when you assign an additional to an article. In a further Customizing view, you can limit the permitted procedures for additionals for each merchandise category for additionals.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

351

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

You define how the system should determine the number. You have the following options: •

•

The number is determined from the corresponding document or the stock. For example, in the case of a goods receipt, the number of labels to be printed results from the goods receipt quantity. The number has a fixed value. In the case of shelf-edge labels, generally only one label is created.

When maintaining a message type in the additionals merchandise category, you determine the message type that is processed when messages from a delivery are edited for an additional.

Figure 142: Additionals: Procedure for Additionals

If you want to create a label for an article, you have to assign the additionals article master as well as the corresponding procedure in the additional data view. The procedure for additionals first has to be defined in Customizing, and it must contain the following control settings: In the Additional req. column, select whether an additional must be created for the procedure for additionals. This should be the rule. However, you can also use a procedure for additionals to transfer texts entered as additional information, to which no additionals are assigned. In this case, do not select the checkbox. If you want to create additionals in the store, the necessary data is sent to the store in assortment list IDocs. For that purpose you need to select the Assortment list checkbox in the corresponding procedure for additionals.

352

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Additionals

If additionals are to be created centrally, for example, in a distribution center, the data changes made to an additional and to the article belonging to it (including the article conditions) are then grouped together and they trigger a data entry in a central additionals IDoc. If the procedure for additionals can only be carried out in selected sites, enter a corresponding class with sites in the Class Type and Class fields As the result of certain events in the applications, for example, when creating a purchase order, the system automatically determines the relevant additionals and processes the data of these additionals. In the respective application, additionals documents are updated and then processed in a follow-up action (for example, they are converted into additionals IDocs). Depending on the application, you can control for which special parameters a follow-up action is triggered for the additional. •

• •

•

In the case of purchase orders, you can differentiate according to the purchase order category and purchase order type, as well as according to the returns indicator. The system can also check whether the procedure for additionals is assigned to the current vendor. This assignment ensures that a vendor only executes tasks that he can actually execute. In the context of vendor price labelling, only the vendor who can attach a price ticket to the goods should receive the information about the corresponding additionals. In the case of goods movements, the movement type is used for control. Using the delivery application, you can control the creation of additionals IDocs for inbound deliveries (shipping notification) and rough goods receipts. For sales orders, sales document categories and the sales document types are used in analysis. If the relevant indicator is set, the system can search the methods provided by the customer, in order to determine the internal procedures for additionals.

If a procedure for additionals is to be valid for all parameter values, you can enter an asterisk (*) in the field. If, for example, a procedure for additionals should be valid for document category F (purchase order) and all order types, enter * as the value for the order type. You can determine when the additionals IDoc is created using these follow-up actions: • • • •

2006/Q2

Create additionals IDoc immediately (when posting in the application) Create a purchase order for additionals Wait for an external additionals IDoc request Control the update in RIS (Retail Information System) depending on the application.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

353

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Consider the following to derive the required procedures for additionals: •

• •

•

Which applications must respond to additionals? Is the information about the assortment list IDoc in stores sufficient? Should you affix additionals, for example, sales price tickets, to goods in a distribution center yourself? Is a dedicated additionals management required to order additionals? Should relevant changes be centrally evaluated for certain additionals? That can, for example, be the case for the central printing of promotion posters. Should the sender be restricted by a plant class, since a goods receipt may occur during a two-step stock transfer between distribution centers in both centers, but the additional should only be applied in one of the two centers? Are additionals used to act as supplementary logistics services within the framework of the merchandise distribution?

Standard Settings Seven procedures for additionals are delivered: • • • • •

The methods 0001 and 0002 refer to the additionals management. Method 0003 shows how an additionals IDoc is created on the basis of a goods receipt. Method 0004 informs stores about additionals to which this procedure for additionals is assigned. Methods 0005 and 0006 exemplify how procedures for additionals can be set as supplementary logistics services for procurement and delivery. Method 0007 displays a setting for the sales order processing. The additionals are determined from the referenced sales document for the delivery.

The methods act as copy templates for user-defined entries with "speaking" descriptions for the procedures for additionals. As soon as user-defined procedures for additionals are set up, the standard entries should be deleted. The Class Type and Class fields are not filled in the standard delivery. No classes are delivered.

354

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

347

Lesson: Additionals

Exercise 25: Additionals Exercise Duration: 20 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Set up the procedures for additionals and assign them to a merchandise category for additionals

Business Example You have started carrying men’s trousers in your assortment and you would like to promote the sale of these trousers with a suitable label during a summer festival. The label will be printed in the store and attached to the garment there too.

Task 1: The data for the labels is created centrally and transferred to the store by the assortment list. The labels are printed in the store on a separate printer. An additionals article must be specified. 1.

In Customizing create a suitable additionals procedure T0## by copying additionals procedure 0004 (with all dependent entries) and selecting the fields according to the task. The description for the additionals procedure is GR##, Print in store.

2.

Now assign the procedure for additionals to the merchandise category Price Label.

3.

How many copies are created for additionals of the merchandise category RT11120? ______________________________________________________

4.

How can you control the number of additionals to be produced? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________

Task 2: Now use your additionals procedure to article R1TA01## and then test the data creation by generating an assortment list. 1.

Assign the sales price label RT311121 to the article R1TA01## as an additional with the procedure for additionals T0##. Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

355

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

356

IRT310

2.

The article should have the following supplementary text on the label: SPECIAL OFFER FOR SUMMER FESTIVAL!

3.

Save the changes to your article.

4.

Manually generate an assortment list for the customer/site R1## in the assortment list type F for the article R1TA01##. Ensure that the article is a generic article and that you also want to take into account the variants in the assortment list.

5.

In the additionals IDoc overview, check whether the data for the additional is contained in the assortment lists IDoc.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Additionals

Solution 25: Additionals Task 1: The data for the labels is created centrally and transferred to the store by the assortment list. The labels are printed in the store on a separate printer. An additionals article must be specified. 1.

In Customizing create a suitable additionals procedure T0## by copying additionals procedure 0004 (with all dependent entries) and selecting the fields according to the task. The description for the additionals procedure is GR##, Print in store.

2.

3.

a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Additionals →  Procedure for Additionals

b)

Select additionals procedure 0004, Edit  → Copy As...

c)

Overwrite 0004 with T0##, change description

d)

Choose Enter.

e)

Table View → Save

Now assign the procedure for additionals to the merchandise category Price Label. a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Additionals →  Procedure for Additionals →  Allowed Procedure for Additionals per Merchandise Category

b)

Select the row with Merchandise category RT11120 and Procedure for additionals 0004, Edit  → Copy As...

c)

Overwrite Proc. for additional with T0##.

d)

Choose Enter.

e)

Table View →  Save

How many copies are created for additionals of the merchandise category RT11120? ______________________________________________________

2006/Q2

a)

IMG: Logistics - General → Additionals →  Attributes of the Merchandise Categories of Additionals

b)

Select merchandise category RT11120.

c)

Choose Details

d)

Number control has the value [ ]. The number is determined from the document Continued on next page

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

357

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

4.

IRT310

How can you control the number of additionals to be produced? ______________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________ a)

The number is determined from the document/stock or it is fixed at 1.

Task 2: Now use your additionals procedure to article R1TA01## and then test the data creation by generating an assortment list. 1.

2.

Assign the sales price label RT311121 to the article R1TA01## as an additional with the procedure for additionals T0##. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Change

b)

Select the Basic Data view.

c)

Choose Additional data

d)

On the Additionals tab: EA

Additionals

RT311121

assigned procedure

T0##

The article should have the following supplementary text on the label: SPECIAL OFFER FOR SUMMER FESTIVAL! a)

3.

Sales unit

Press Change supplementary text and, for Texts in language EN, enter: Special Offer for Summer Festival.

Save the changes to your article. a)

Choose Enter and choose F3 to go back (green arrow).

b)

Article → Save

Continued on next page

358

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Additionals

4.

Manually generate an assortment list for the customer/site R1## in the assortment list type F for the article R1TA01##. Ensure that the article is a generic article and that you also want to take into account the variants in the assortment list. a)

5.

Sales Organization

RG10

Distribution Channel

R1

Customer No.-Plant

R1##

Assortment List Type

F

Article

R1TA01##

b)

Program → Execute or F8

c)

Consider Variants

In the additionals IDoc overview, check whether the data for the additional is contained in the assortment lists IDoc. a)

2006/Q2

Retailing: Master Data → Assortment/Listing → Assortment List → Generate → Manual Selection:

Retailing: Sales → Additionals → Environment → IDoc Overview Created On

Current date

Partner Number

R1##

b)

Program → Execute or F8

c)

Double-click message type WBBDLD.

d)

Double-click the last IDoc.

e)

Expand the Data Records node.

f)

Behind each segment E1WBB01, there is another segment E1WBB03 and there is another segment E1WTADAL1 behind this segment too. The data for the additional of the relevant article can be found in this segment.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

359

Unit 7: Generic Articles and Variants

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the most important parameters • Assign additionals to an article

360

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Create characteristics • Assign characteristic values to characteristics • Group characteristic values together • Create characteristics profiles and assign them to the merchandise category • Explain the difference between generic articles and single articles • List the prerequisites for creating a generic article • Create a generic article with variants • Maintain different prices for individual variants of a generic article • Name the possible uses of the prepack • Describe the structure of a prepack • Create a prepack article for an existing generic article • Explain which controls are necessary for additionals and set the most important parameters • Assign additionals to an article

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

361

Unit Summary

362

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 8 Structured Articles

355

Structured articles are always made up of several components.

Unit Overview The unit describes how structured articles are displayed in SAP Retail, and explains the inventory management options of structured articles in the logistical process, as well as the special features of the full product and the empties article.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • •

Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are Create a full product with empties components

Unit Contents Lesson: Structured Articles ....................................................364 Exercise 26: Full Products and Empties.................................373

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

363

Unit 8: Structured Articles

Lesson: 356

IRT310

Structured Articles Lesson Duration: 45 Minutes

Lesson Overview In this unit you learn how to create articles made up of several components, such as sales sets and displays. You also learn how deposit articles are mapped in the system.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are Create a full product with empties components

The article category prepack is dealt with in the Generic Article unit.

Business Example You add beverages, which are sold in deposit bottles, to your assortment. To be able to manage such articles with the SAP system, you create a full product and assign the deposit bottles and empty cases components to this full product.

364

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Structured Articles

Types of Structured Articles

Figure 143: Structured Articles: Article Categories

Structured articles are made up of several different articles. You have to enter the components as well as the quantities in which they appear in the structured articles. The display is a quantity of single articles or variants of one or more generic articles. A display is purchased as an individual article. Therefore, it has its own article number, a purchase price and purchase price conditions. Displays are made up by the manufacturer or vendor. The Sales set is a quantity of single articles or variants of one or more generic articles. It is sold as an individual article. Therefore, it has its own article number, a sales price and sales price conditions. Purchasing sets are already in the form of a set when the articles are purchased, are managed as a set right through the supply chain, and are sold as a set or as single articles. This means, for example, a wheelbarrow is ordered and posted, components (trough, frame and wheel) are delivered, which can be sold in the store as a wheelbarrow (set) or as single articles. A prepack is a quantity of variants of one or more generic articles. A prepack is purchased as an individual article. Therefore, it has its own article number, a purchase price and purchase price conditions. Unlike displays, the components in prepacks must belong to the same merchandise category as the prepack itself.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

365

Unit 8: Structured Articles

IRT310

Structured Articles: Structure and Definition • • •

A structured article consists of several components. The components themselves are also created as articles in the system Bills of material are used for structuring Structured articles can be left in their structure in logistics or they can be divided into individual components.

Further settings for structured articles can be found under the following menu path in Customizing Logistics - General -> Material Master -> Retail-Specific Settings -> Settings for Structured Materials. When you use bills of material for empties for a full product, the system checks whether the BOM Usage indicator has been set in the basic data of the full product (in other words, whether there is a bill of material or whether one can be created).

Figure 144: Structured Articles: Sales Set

As a rule, a sales set is a collection of separate articles for the purpose of defining a total sales price. The sales set articles can often be sold as separate articles. From the purchasing point of view, sets can be considered as several articles. From a sales point of view, the sales set is to be considered as one article that has a sales price and a tax code. Sales set components can be considered as individual articles. They may belong to different merchandise categories and have different tax codes. The set itself, however, can only have one tax rate Inventory is managed at component level, if the components can be sold separately. It can also be carried out at set level. In Customizing, you can define the Inventory Management split, that is define Inventory managment on component or header level.

366

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Structured Articles

Another form is the price set: The set is only created by assigning a common sales price. This is generally lower than the total of the components’ sales prices which can basically all be sold individually. The components are not physically combined by means of packaging. If sets and the articles contained in them are sold individually in the store (for example, cases and a set of three cases), then you should carry the stock on the individual article level (components). The component stock decreases as the sets are sold. Any profit losses incurred by the sale of the set are posted to a separate account (POS inbound).

Figure 145: Structured Articles: Display

A display is always a quantity of articles grouped together by the manufacturer or vendor, which may have a common purchasing price and are usually bought under the same article number. The articles are usually presented in the same packaging. It is not until the display reaches the stores that it is split up into its individual components for sale to the consumer. Displays are used most often in promotions. Usually, they are not ordered directly by the stores, but are allocated to the stores centrally. As a rule, inventory is managed in the store at individual component level, and in the distribution center, it is managed for complete displays. You can determine in Customizing at which level the system should do the inventory split of the display.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

367

Unit 8: Structured Articles

IRT310

Figure 146: Structured Articles: Prepacks

Figure 147: Structured Article in the Logistical Process

In this Customizing view, you can determine on which levels in the logistics chain (distribution center, store) and in which transactions you want to split the set, display and prepack bills of material for inventory management: In purchase orders, the resolution is purely informative. A split in the goods receipt means that, from this level, inventory is managed on component level and the header article has no stock.

368

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Structured Articles

You can determine the split of the structured articles at the following levels: store/DC, distribution chain, individual sites and for individual structured articles.

Figure 148: Settings for Structured Articles Maintenance

Sets, displays, prepacks and empties are structured articles that consist of several components. In this case, you must specify not only the components, but also the quantities in which the components are contained in the structured article. This relationship is shown in the bills of material. The bill of material usage key defines the enterprise areas, in which a bill of material can be used (for example production, sales). It controls the processing in the downstream work areas. The item category controls the classification of the item in a bill of material according to set criteria, such as the object reference (article master record) or the inventory management. This enables item-relevant data to be processed for the bill of material. You can for example control field selection, default values in bill of material maintenance or special system activities with the item category that you select. For example, for an item category such as a stock item, you can maintain article data which enables inventory management.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

369

Unit 8: Structured Articles

IRT310

Figure 149: Creating a Structured Article: Prepack Example

The respective articles are created with article category PREPACK. The components are assigned to the prepack in the basic data. Here you need to determine how many of each individual variant is assigned to the prepack. You can distribute the quantities of variants using value and quota scales.

Empties Full Products and Empties: Terms •

Full Product

•

– Real goods – Also referred to as articles with empties Empties Articles

•

– Packaging material – Also referred to as a deposit article Bill of Material for Empties

•

– Assignment of full products/empties articles in kind and quantity Tied Empties Article

•

– Stock of “full” empties Non-Tied Empties Article –

370

Stock of “empty” empties

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Structured Articles

An empties article is a form of returnable transport packaging or sales packaging that is usually subject to a deposit. The empties article is assigned to a full product. You can flag a full product by setting the With bill of material for empties indicator in the article master record when you are creating the basic data screen. The bill of material for empties shows the relationship between a full product and an empties article: The full product and the unit of measure together make up the BOM header. The empties articles that you have assigned form the components. The individual BOM components and the full product itself all have their own article master record. In the standard SAP Retail system, you create an empties article as a single article with the article type Empties and a full product as a single article too, with the article type Full products. If you are listing a full product that is assigned an empties article, then the empties article will also automatically be listed.

Figure 150: Full Products and Empties Articles: Empties Processing

You can only move goods with tied empties when you have activated empties processing in Customizing. When you activate the empties processing, stock fields that are necessary for updating the tied empties stock are initialized.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

371

Unit 8: Structured Articles

IRT310

Discontinuing Structured Articles Features of Structured Article Discontinuation • • •

•

372

If a generic article is discontinued, all its variants must be discontinued beforehand You may discontinue a variant of a generic article. Sales set, prepack, display: – A bill of material can be either completely discontinued or – A bill of material can be discontinued without its components Empties articles can only be discontinued if they are not assigned to a full product.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

365

Lesson: Structured Articles

Exercise 26: Full Products and Empties Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a full product with the copy function. • Assign empties components, such as deposit bottles and empty cases, to a full product.

Business Example You add Cola to your beverages assortment. To do this, you create a full product and assign the deposit bottle and empty case components to this full product.

Task 1: Create an article master record for your full product. You use the copy function to do this. 1.

Use article 311240 (water) as a template and so as a data source. The new article (target article) should receive the article number A6##.

2.

Copy the underlying article data.

Task 2: After the new article A6## is created, you change the description to Cola and assign the empties.

2006/Q2

1.

The full product Cola can be sold in individual bottles and in cases of 24 bottles. Create the empties components in question for the particular unit of measure. Note that a full product case consists of 24 bottles and an empty case. Use the article 311223 as a deposit bottle, use the article 311222 as an empty case. Save the entries you have made. Note: to assign empties components to several units of measure, the article must be saved and then called again every time a unit of measure is maintained.

2.

Which components and quantities are assigned to the unit of measure case in the Empties BOM? ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________

3.

Which components and component quantities are assigned to the unit of measure each in the Empties BOM? ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

373

Unit 8: Structured Articles

IRT310

Solution 26: Full Products and Empties Task 1: Create an article master record for your full product. You use the copy function to do this. 1.

Use article 311240 (water) as a template and so as a data source. The new article (target article) should receive the article number A6##. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Copy

b)

2.

Source article - article number

311240

Target Article - article number

A6##

Copy the underlying article data. a)

Select Underlying Material Data. Execute (F8) Exit from the message text by choosing the Back arrow. You go back to the Copy Article entry screen.

Task 2: After the new article A6## is created, you change the description to Cola and assign the empties. 1.

The full product Cola can be sold in individual bottles and in cases of 24 bottles. Create the empties components in question for the particular unit of measure. Note that a full product case consists of 24 bottles and an empty case. Use the article 311223 as a deposit bottle, use the article 311222 as

Continued on next page

374

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Structured Articles

an empty case. Save the entries you have made. Note: to assign empties components to several units of measure, the article must be saved and then called again every time a unit of measure is maintained. a)

On the Copy Article entry screen, click on the target article number and choose Change Article. Or: Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Change and specify the new article number. Select the Basic Data view and choose Enter . In the Basic Data view, change the article description and choose the Components button.

b)

On the Change Empties BOM entry screen, enter CSE (for case) as the Unit of Measure and choose Enter. In the Component Overview for component 311222 (empties), enter 1 as the quantity and choose Enter. Enter the Component quantity 24 for the component 311223 (deposit bottle), and choose Enter. Choose the Back arrow. Save Repeat the solution given in a) to maintain the unit of measure EA (each), since only one bill of material can be created in a transaction. On the Change Empties BOM entry screen, enter EA as the Unit of Measure and choose Enter. In the Component Overview for component 311223 (deposit bottle), enter 1 as the Component quantity and choose Enter. Choose the Back arrow. Save

2.

Which components and quantities are assigned to the unit of measure case in the Empties BOM? ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ a)

3.

Which components and component quantities are assigned to the unit of measure each in the Empties BOM? ____________________________________________ ____________________________________________ a)

2006/Q2

Component 311223 (deposit bottle) with 24 bottles and component 311222 (empty case) with one case.

Component 311223 (deposit bottle) with one bottle.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

375

Unit 8: Structured Articles

IRT310

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them • Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are • Create a full product with empties components

376

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Name the different article categories and the basic differences between them • Explain what the features of full products and empties articles are • Create a full product with empties components

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

377

Unit Summary

378

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Unit 9 Logistical Variants

371

Unit Overview This unit describes the scope of functionality of logistical variants in SAP Retail and explains how logistical variants are created.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • •

Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail Create logistical variants

Unit Contents Lesson: Logistical Variants ....................................................380 Exercise 27: Logistical Variants ..........................................385

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

379

Unit 9: Logistical Variants

Lesson: 372

IRT310

Logistical Variants Lesson Duration: 60 Minutes

Lesson Overview Normally, the base unit of measure of an article is used for inventory management and requirements planning. However, for some articles it can be necessary to simultaneously carry stock in different units of measure, or to also plan an article in different units of measure. In this case, you must create an article as logistical variants.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail Create logistical variants

Point out to the participants that logistical variants should really only be created for articles in exceptional cases (see the overview). Since a dedicated article (variant) is created with logistical variants for each unit of measure, the total number of articles increases dramatically.

Business Example You carry a new yoghurt in the assortment, which is to be carried in the unit of measure Each and in the unit of measure Tray.

Logistical Variants Logistical Variants: Definition • •

380

A logistical variant is the variant of a generic article for a specific unit of measure. Using logistical variants, you can carry separate stocks in various units of measure for an article and the article can be procured in each of these units of measure.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Logistical Variants

Figure 151: Logistical Variants: Example

You can assign different units of measure to each logistical variant’s article master record. The following types of logistical variants exist: The procurement variant is the variant for the unit of measure in which an article is procured either from an internal or an external vendor. You can have several procurement variants for an article. The sales variant is the variant for the unit of measure in which an article is carried for sale to the consumers. Sales transactions reduce the inventory of this unit of measure (variant). For each generic article there is only one sales variant. This variant can be sold in various sizes of packaging that you have to enter into the article master record of the variant as alternative units of measure.

Figure 152: Logistical Variants: Creating Variants

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

381

Unit 9: Logistical Variants

IRT310

The merchandise category in which the logistical variant is created must have at least one characteristic that has the logistical unit of measure feature (relevancy indicator = 3). Characteristics for logistical units of measure can also be grouped under characteristic profiles and assigned to merchandise categories. The logistical units of measure have to be defined in Customizing as units of measure under General Settings - Check Units of Measurement.

Figure 153: Logistical Variants: Assigning Quantities

When creating the generic article you determine which unit of measure will be used as the sales unit of measure. The procurement units of measure are automatically assigned to the variants in this way. If the indicator in the sales view is set to Sales UoM not variable, no other sales unit of measure can be assigned to the individual variants. If the indicator has not been set, then you have to adjust the sales period in the listing accordingly.

382

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Logistical Variants

Figure 154: Logistical Variants: Listing

By assigning the units of measure in the basic data view, the following validity periods for listing and sales are assigned by the listing: The variant with the sales unit of measure is listed for one day, so that the article cannot be procured in this unit of measure. The sales period is defaulted from the validity period in the basic data. The procurement variants are listed in connection with the validity period for exactly this time-frame so that the article can also be procured in these units of measure. The sales period is set to only one day (current date) as these variants and their units of measure were not defined as sales units of measure.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

383

Unit 9: Logistical Variants

384

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

377

Lesson: Logistical Variants

Exercise 27: Logistical Variants Exercise Duration: 15 Minutes

Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create additional units of measure as characteristics for logistical variants • Create logistical variants and list them accordingly

Business Example In your stores and distribution centers you want to define the units of measure in which you order, deliver and sell yogurt. To do this, you add the required characteristic Logistical units of measure to the merchandise category for dairy products.

Task 1: Create a characteristic for logistical units of measure with the characteristic name LO_ME1##. 1.

The characteristic description is Log. units of measure Gr##. The data type is Character format and the number of characters should be limited to three.

2.

Maintain the description in German: Log. Mengeneinheiten Gr##.

3.

You should be able to choose from all characteristic values that are available in the check table.

4.

Save the characteristic.

Task 2: In future, merchandise category RS14110 should use your characteristic for the logistical units of measure. You use a characteristic profile for this. 1.

Create characteristic profile PRO2## and assign your characteristic LO_ME1## to it. Set the relevancy indicator so that the characteristics can be recognized as logistical units of measure.

2.

You then assign characteristic profile PRO2## to merchandise category RS14110.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

385

Unit 9: Logistical Variants

IRT310

Task 3: Now create a new article yoghurt as a logistical variant. Select the Basic Data and Listing views. 1.

Your new article has the article number A7##. You want to create it in article type FRIP (Perishables) and merchandise category RS14110. Logistical variants are always created as generic articles.

2.

Choose your characteristic profile PRO2## by double-clicking it, and create the yogurt for the following combinations of characteristic values of your characteristic LO_ME1##: Each

X

Pack

X

Layer

X

3.

Enter “Yoghurt Gr##” as the article short text.

4.

The unit of measure is calculated as follows: EA

=

1 EA

PAC

=

12 EA

LAY

=

600 EA

Task 4: Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants. 1.

Use the listing procedure that checks merchandise categories and assortment grades.

2.

Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments. Go to the individual variants. Why are the listing and sales periods different? EA: ___________________ PAC: ___________________ LAY: ___________________

3.

386

Save your logistical variants.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Logistical Variants

Solution 27: Logistical Variants Task 1: Create a characteristic for logistical units of measure with the characteristic name LO_ME1##. 1.

The characteristic description is Log. units of measure Gr##. The data type is Character format and the number of characters should be limited to three. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Merchandise Category Data → Characteristics → Characteristics Management. Characteristic

LO_ME1##

Enter

2.

Description

Log.

Data Type

Character Format

Number of Chars

3

Maintain the description in German: Log. Mengeneinheiten Gr##. a)

Descriptions tab DE

3.

Log. Gr##

Mengeneinheiten

You should be able to choose from all characteristic values that are available in the check table. a)

4.

units of measure Gr##

On the Values tab: click the Other Value Check button and choose the check table T006.

Save the characteristic. a)

Characteristic → Save

Task 2: In future, merchandise category RS14110 should use your characteristic for the logistical units of measure. You use a characteristic profile for this. 1.

Create characteristic profile PRO2## and assign your characteristic LO_ME1## to it.

Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

387

Unit 9: Logistical Variants

IRT310

Set the relevancy indicator so that the characteristics can be recognized as logistical units of measure. a)

b)

c) 2.

Retailing: Master data → Merchandise Category Data → Characteristics Profile → Create Characteristic Profile

PRO2##

Description

Logistical Variants ##

Characteristics tab Characteristic

LO_ME1##

Relevancy Indicator

3

Save

You then assign characteristic profile PRO2## to merchandise category RS14110. a)

Retailing: Master data → Merchandise Category Data → Merchandise Category → Change

b)

Enter PRO2## in the Hierarchy assignment subscreen behind Characteristic profile, and choose the Assign Profile button.

Task 3: Now create a new article yoghurt as a logistical variant. Select the Basic Data and Listing views. 1.

Your new article has the article number A7##. You want to create it in article type FRIP (Perishables) and merchandise category RS14110. Logistical variants are always created as generic articles. a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Create

b)

Select the Basic Data and Listing views.

c)

Article Number

A7##

Merchandise Category

RS14110

Article Type

Perishables

Article Category

Generic article

Enter

Continued on next page

388

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Logistical Variants

2.

Choose your characteristic profile PRO2## by double-clicking it, and create the yogurt for the following combinations of characteristic values of your characteristic LO_ME1##: Each

X

Pack

X

Layer

X

a)

Double-click the characteristics profile PRO2##.

b)

Then select the F4 Help beside your characteristic LO_ME1##, and select the values for Each, Pack and Layer in the Characteristic Value Assignment subscreen.

c)

Choose Enter.

d)

To go to the generic article matrix, choose F3.

e)

Select the combinations as follows:

f) 3.

X

Pack

X

Layer

X

Choose F8 to go back to the Basic Data view of the article.

Enter “Yoghurt Gr##” as the article short text. a)

4.

Each

Article short text:Yoghurt Gr##

The unit of measure is calculated as follows: EA

=

1 EA

PAC

=

12 EA

LAY

=

600 EA

a)

Basic Data tab

b)

In the Units of measure/EANs/dimensions subscreen: EA

=

1 EA

PAC

=

12 EA

LAY

=

600 EA Continued on next page

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

389

Unit 9: Logistical Variants

IRT310

Task 4: Go to the Listing view and list the generic article with all its variants. 1.

2.

Use the listing procedure that checks merchandise categories and assortment grades. a)

Listing tab

b)

Listing Procedure: B1

c)

Click the Execute Listing button.

d)

Click the Assorts button.

e)

Article → Save

Perform the listing and display the results for the assortments. Go to the individual variants. Why are the listing and sales periods different? EA: ___________________ PAC: ___________________ LAY: ___________________ a)

Retailing: Master Data → Article Data → Article → Change

b)

Select the Listing view.

c)

Click the Validity Area button. EA: The variant EA is listed for a day; the selling period depends on the validity period. This means that the variant EA cannot be ordered, but it can be sold. PAC: the variant PAC is listed as the validity period, but the selling period is one day. This means that the variant PAC cannot be sold, but it can be ordered. LAY: as PAC

3.

Save your logistical variants. a)

390

Choose Save.

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Lesson: Logistical Variants

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail • Create logistical variants

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

391

Unit Summary

IRT310

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the range of functions of logistical variants in SAP Retail • Create logistical variants

392

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

IRT310

Course Summary

Course Summary You should now be able to: • • •

2006/Q2

Describe the organizational structures in SAP Retail and know where these organizational structures can be set up Maintain general Retail master data and configure it according to your requirements Describe the SAP Retail reference concept and use it according to your requirements

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

393

Course Summary

394

IRT310

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

2006/Q2

Feedback SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.

2006/Q2

© 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

395